Communication device

ABSTRACT

The communication device which includes a voice communicating implementer, a video game implementer, an auto time adjusting implementer, a moving picture displaying implementer, a calculating implementer, a bold formatting implementer, an italic formatting implementer, a font formatting implementer, a stereo audio output implementer, a device vibration implementer, a photo quality setting implementer, a multiple language implementer, and a caller&#39;s information displaying implementer.

CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application is a continuation of U.S. Ser. No. 12/972,439 filedDec. 18, 2010, now U.S. Pat. No. 7,996,038 which is a continuation ofU.S. Ser. No. 11/688,901 filed Mar. 21, 2007, now U.S. Pat. No.7,890,136 which is a continuation of U.S. Ser. No. 10/710,600 filed Jul.23, 2004, now U.S. Pat. No. 8,090,402, which claims the benefit of U.S.Provisional Application No. 60/481,426 filed Sep. 26, 2003, all of whichare hereby incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.

BACKGROUND OF INVENTION

The invention relates to communication device and more particularly tothe communication device which is capable to communicate with anothercommunication device in a wireless fashion.

U.S. Patent Publication No. 20030119562 is introduced as a prior art ofthe present invention of which the summary is the following: “There areprovided a task display switching method, a portable apparatus and aportable communications apparatus which, when a plurality of applicationsoftware are activated and processed in parallel, make it possible toswitch a display between each of the application software with ease.According to the task display switching method, the portable apparatusand the portable communications apparatus of the present invention, in aportable apparatus capable of processing a plurality of tasks inparallel and of displaying a plurality of display regions for displayingdata, an icon associated with a task displayed on a first display regionis generated automatically or manually, and the generated icon isdisplayed in a second display region. When any icon thus generated isselected from a plurality of icons displayed on the second displayregion, the task associated with the selected icon is restored anddisplayed in the first display region.” However, the foregoing prior artdoes not disclose the communication device which includes a voicecommunicating implementer, an auto time adjusting implementer, a movingpicture displaying implementer, a calculating implementer, a boldformatting implementer, an italic formatting implementer, a fontformatting implementer, a stereo audio output implementer, a devicevibration implementer, a photo quality setting implementer, a multiplelanguage implementer, and a caller's information displaying implementer.

For the avoidance of doubt, the number of the prior arts introducedherein (and/or in IDS) may be of a large one, however, applicant has nointent to hide the more relevant prior art(s) in the less relevant ones.

SUMMARY OF INVENTION

It is an object of the present invention to provide a device capable toimplement a plurality of functions.

It is another object of the present invention to provide merchandise tomerchants attractive to the customers in the U.S.

It is another object of the present invention to provide mobility to theusers of communication device.

It is another object of the present invention to provide moreconvenience to the customers in the U.S.

It is another object of the present invention to provide moreconvenience to the users of communication device or any tangible thingin which the communication device is fixedly or detachably (i.e.,removably) installed.

It is another object of the present invention to overcome theshortcomings associated with the foregoing prior art.

(Blank)

The present invention introduces the communication device which includesa voice communicating implementer, an auto time adiusting implementer, amoving picture displaying implementer, a calculating implementer, a boldformatting implementer, an italic formatting implementer, a fontformatting implementer, a stereo audio output implementer, a devicevibration implementer, a photo quality setting implementer, a multiplelanguage implementer, and a caller's information displaying implementer.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF DRAWINGS

The above and other aspects, features, and advantages of the inventionwill be better understood by reading the following more particulardescription of the invention, presented in conjunction with thefollowing drawing, wherein:

FIG. 1 is a block diagram illustrating an exemplary embodiment of thepresent invention.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

The following description is of the best presently contemplated mode ofcarrying out the present invention. This description is not to be takenin a limiting sense but is made merely for the purpose of describing thegeneral principles of the invention. For example, each description ofrandom access memory in this specification illustrate(s) only onefunction or mode in order to avoid complexity in its explanation,however, such description does not mean that only one function or modecan be implemented at a time. In other words, more than one function ormode can be implemented simultaneously by way of utilizing the samerandom access memory. In addition, the figure number is cited after theelements in parenthesis in a manner for example ‘RAM 206 (FIG. 1)’. Itis done so merely to assist the readers to have a better understandingof this specification, and must not be used to limit the scope of theclaims in any manner since the figure numbers cited are not exclusive.There are only few data stored in each storage area described in thisspecification. This is done so merely to simplify the explanation and,thereby, to enable the reader of this specification to understand thecontent of each function with less confusion. Therefore, more than fewdata (hundreds and thousands of data, if necessary) of the same kind,not to mention, are preferred to be stored in each storage area to fullyimplement each function described herein. The scope of the inventionshould be determined by referencing the appended claims.

FIG. 1 is a simplified block diagram of the Communication Device 200utilized in the present invention. In this embodiment, CommunicationDevice 200 includes CPU 211 which controls and administers the overallfunction and operation of Communication Device 200. CPU 211 uses RAM 206to temporarily store data and/or to perform calculation to perform itsfunction, and to implement the present invention, modes, functions, andsystems explained hereinafter. Video Processor 202 generates analogand/or digital video signals which are displayed on LCD 201. ROM 207stores the data and programs which are essential to operateCommunication Device 200. Wireless signals are received by Antenna 218and processed by Signal Processor 208. Input signals are input by InputDevice 210, such as a dial pad, a joystick, and/or a keypad, and thesignals are transferred via Input Interface 209 and Data Bus 203 to CPU211. Indicator 212 is an LED lamp which is designed to output differentcolors (e.g., red, blue, green, etc). Analog audio data is input toMicrophone 215. A/D 213 converts the analog audio data into a digitalformat. Speaker 216 outputs analog audio data which is converted into ananalog format from digital format by D/A 204. Sound Processor 205produces digital audio signals that are transferred to D/A 204 and alsoprocesses the digital audio signals transferred from A/D 213. CCD Unit214 captures video image which is stored in RAM 206 in a digital format.Vibrator 217 vibrates the entire device by the command from CPU 211.

As another embodiment, LCD 201 or LCD 201/Video Processor 202 may beseparated from the other elements described in FIG. 1, and be connectedin a wireless fashion to be wearable and/or head-mountable.

When Communication Device 200 is in the voice communication mode, theanalog audio data input to Microphone 215 is converted to a digitalformat by A/D 213 and transmitted to another device via Antenna 218 in awireless fashion after being processed by Signal Processor 208, and thewireless signal representing audio data which is received via Antenna218 is output from Speaker 216 after being processed by Signal Processor208 and converted to analog signal by D/A 204. For the avoidance ofdoubt, the definition of Communication Device 200 in this specificationincludes so-called ‘PDA’. The definition of Communication Device 200also includes in this specification any device which is mobile and/orportable and which is capable to send and/or receive audio data, textdata, image data, video data, and/or other types of data in a wirelessfashion via Antenna 218. The definition of Communication Device 200further includes any micro device embedded or installed into devices andequipments (e.g., VCR, TV, tape recorder, heater, air conditioner, fan,clock, micro wave oven, dish washer, refrigerator, oven, washingmachine, dryer, door, window, automobile, motorcycle, and modem) toremotely control these devices and equipments. The size of CommunicationDevice 200 is irrelevant. Communication Device 200 may be installed inhouses, buildings, bridges, boats, ships, submarines, airplanes, andspaceships, and firmly fixed therein.

This paragraph illustrate(s) the elements of Communication Device 200.The elements of Communication Device 200 described in this paragraph isidentical to the ones described in FIG. 1, except Communication Device200 has new element, i.e., LED 219. Here, LED 219 receives infra redsignals from other wireless devices, which are transferred to CPU 211via Data Bus 203. LED 219 also sends infra red signals in a wirelessfashion which are composed by CPU 211 and transferred via Data Bus 203.As the second embodiment, LED 219 may be connected to Signal Processor208. Here, LED 219 transfers the received infra red signals to SignalProcessor 208, and Signal Processor 208 processes and converts thesignals to a CPU readable format which are transferred to CPU 211 viaData Bus 203. The data produced by CPU 211 are processed by SignalProcessor 208 and transferred to another device via LED 219 in awireless fashion. The task of LED 219 is as same as that of Antenna 218described in FIG. 1 except that LED 219 utilizes infra red signals forimplementing wireless communication in the second embodiment. For theavoidance of doubt, the reference to FIG. 1 (e.g., referring to FIG. 1in parenthesis) automatically refers to this paragraph in thisspecification.

This paragraph illustrate(s) the data stored in Host H. In the presentembodiment, Host H includes Host Information Storage Area H00a whichstores various types of data to assist and/or co-operate withCommunication Device 200 to implement all modes, functions, and systemsdescribed in this specification. As another embodiment, Host H may becomposed of a plurality of computers, i.e., one master computer and aplurality of slave computers, wherein the master computer is connectedto the plurality of slave computers. As another embodiment, Host H mayalso be composed of a plurality of master computers by way of utilizingpeer-to-peer connection.

<<3D Video Game Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the video game function ofCommunication Device 200 (FIG. 1).

In this embodiment, Host H includes Host Game Data Storage Area Ha. InHost Game Data Storage Area Ha, a plurality of game data are stored fordownloading purposes. Games G1, G2, G3, and G4 are stored in Host GameData Storage Area Ha in the example illustrated hereinbefore.

This paragraph illustrates the sequence to initiate the game function.First of all, a list of modes is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1).When an input signal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) orvia voice recognition system to select a specific mode (S2), theselected mode is activated. In this embodiment, the communication modeis activated (S3a) when the communication mode is selected in theprevious step, the game download mode is activated (S3b) when the gamedownload mode is selected in the previous step, and the game play modeis activated (S3c) when game play mode is selected in the previous step.The modes displayed on LCD 201 in S1 which are selected and activated inS2 and S3 may include all functions and modes explained in thisspecification. Once the selected mode is activated, another mode can beactivated while the first activated mode is still implemented by goingthrough the steps of S1 through S3 for another mode, thereby enabling aplurality of functions and modes being performed simultaneously (S4).Here, communication mode is a mode which enables Communication Device200 to communicate (i.e., send and/or receive audio data, text data,image data, video data, and/or other types of data in a wireless fashionvia Antenna 218) in a wireless fashion with other Communication Devices200. The same meaning applies hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in RAM 206 (FIG. 1). In thisembodiment, the data to activate (as described in S3a of the previousparagraph) and to perform the communication mode is stored inCommunication Data Storage Area 2061a, the data to activate (asdescribed in S3b of the previous paragraph) and to perform game downloadmode is stored in Game DL Data Storage Area 2061b, and the data toactivate (as described in S3c of the previous paragraph) and to performgame play mode is stored in 2061c.

This paragraph illustrates the method of activating and deactivating thegame mode by utilizing the voice recognition system explainedhereinbefore. The voice recognition system is turned on, in the firstplace (S1), and the game mode is activated by utilizing the voicerecognition system (S2). When utilizing the game mode is over, it isdeactivated by utilizing the voice recognition system, and the system isturned off thereafter (S3).

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of downloading a game data,i.e., a game software program, from Host H. In this embodiment, a listof game data is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). When an input signalis input from Input Device 210 or by the voice recognition system toselect a specific game data (S2), the selected game data is downloadedto Communication Device 200 and is stored in Game DL Data Storage Area2061b (S3). The downloaded game data is decompressed thereafter by CPU211 (FIG. 1).

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Game Play Data StorageArea 2061c. The decompressed game data are allocated to thepredetermined areas, i.e., Game Software Storage Area 2061d, 3D ObjectData Storage Area 2061e, Texture Data Storage Area 2061f, and GameProcess Data Storage Area 2061g. Here, Game Software Storage Area 2061dstores a series of software program to perform the game function ofCommunication Device 200. 3D Object Data Storage Area 2061e stores thethree-dimensional data of the three-dimensional objects displayed on LCD201 (FIG. 1), such as the shape of each three-dimensional object in apolygon form (or in a wire frame form), and the three-dimensional dataof all parts (components) of each three-dimensional object. Texture DataStorage Area 2061f stores a plurality of data of textures which are‘pasted’ on each three-dimensional object (or on each part thereof) whensuch three-dimensional object is displayed on LCD 201. Game Process DataStorage Area 2061g stores a plurality of data necessary to process thegame software program, such as the strength and speed of eachthree-dimensional object, the layout of the background displayed on LCD201, the weather described in the game, the property of each shadowdisplayed adjacent to the three-dimensional object, the movement of theobjects which are controllable by the user of Communication Device 200,and the movement of the objects which are not controllable by the userof Communication Device 200.

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of the game software programstored in Game Software Storage Area 2061d. When the game mode isstarted by voice recognition system as described in S1 and S2 explainedhereinbefore, the game initiation process is initiated by CPU 211(FIG. 1) (S1). Here, CPU 211 reads, by following the instructionswritten in the game software program stored in Game Software StorageArea 2061d, all the address data stored in 3D Object Data Storage Area2061e, Texture Data Storage Area 2061f, and Game Process Data StorageArea 2061g to promptly retrieve the required data to process the gamewhen necessary. During the game initiation process, an initiation screenis displayed on LCD 201. Once the game is started, CPU 211 checks thestatus of the input signal from Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or by thevoice recognition system. If an input signal is detected (S2), aresponse to such input signal is processed by CPU 211 by retrieving datafrom Game Process Data Storage Area 2061g (S3). For example, if theinput signal instructs to move forward the three-dimensional object, CPU211 calculates the next action of its body parts (e.g., pushing forwardits right leg) by retrieving data from Game Process Data Storage Area2061g. CPU 211 also processes with the three-dimensional objects whichare irrelevant to the input signal input from Input Device 210 byretrieving data from Game Process Data Storage Area 2061g, for examplethe background objects displayed on LCD 201 including, clouds,pedestrians, buildings, traffic lights, and bridges (S4). CPU 211 alsocalculates the three-dimensional data of each three-dimensional objectand the three-dimensional data of all parts thereof in thethree-dimensional game space by retrieving data from three-dimensionalobject Data Storage Area 2061e (S4). CPU 211 then retrieves thedesignated textures from Texture Data Storage Area 2061f and ‘pastes’them to the three-dimensional objects (S4). The three-dimensionalobjects with textures ‘pasted’ are displayed on LCD 201 (S5). Thesequence of S2 through S5 is repeated until the game is over (S6), andthe game termination process, i.e., a process to terminate the game modeis initiated thereafter (S7).

This paragraph illustrates the process to allocate Input Device 210(FIG. 1) to perform the game function. In this embodiment, when the gameinitiation process is initiated as explained in S1 explainedhereinbefore, the key allocation process is initiated simultaneously. Asthe result of the key allocation process, Input Device 210 normallyutilized for communication purposes, including keypad and buttons, isallocated as input means for performing the game function. In thisembodiment, Key #1 is assigned for instructing CPU 211 to move up thethree-dimensional object, Key #2 is assigned for instructing CPU 211 tomove down the three-dimensional object, Key #3 is assigned forinstructing CPU 211 to move left the three-dimensional object, Key #4 isassigned for instructing CPU 211 to move right the three-dimensionalobject, Key #5 is assigned for instructing CPU 211 to make thethree-dimensional object to jump, and Key #6 is assigned for instructingCPU 211 to make the three-dimensional object to dash, and all theforegoing data are stored in Key Allocation Data Storage Area 2061h.

<<Auto Time Adjust Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the automatic time adjust function,i.e., a function which automatically adjusts the clock of CommunicationDevice 200.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in RAM 206 (FIG. 1). In thisembodiment, RAM 206 includes Auto Time Adjust Software Storage Area2069a, Current Time Data Storage Area 2069b, and Auto Time Data StorageArea 2069c. Auto Time Adjust Software Storage Area 2069a stores softwareprogram to implement the present function which is explained in detailshereinafter, Current Time Data Storage Area 2069b stores the data whichrepresents the current time, and Auto Time Data Storage Area 2069c is aworking area assigned for implementing the present function.

This paragraph illustrates a software program stored in Auto Time AdjustSoftware Storage Area 2069a. First of all, Communication Device 200 isconnected to Network NT (e.g., the Internet) via Antenna 218 (FIG. 1)(S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then retrieves an atomic clock data from NetworkNT (S2) and the current time data from Current Time Data Storage Area2069b, and compares both data. If the difference between both data isnot within the predetermined value X (S3), CPU 211 adjusts the currenttime data (S4). The method to adjust the current data can be eithersimply overwrite the data stored in Current Time Data Storage Area 2069bwith the atomic clock data retrieved from Network NT or calculate thedifference of the two data and add or subtract the difference to or fromthe current time data stored in Current Time Data Storage Area 2069b byutilizing Auto Time Data Storage Area 2069c as a working area.

This paragraph illustrates another software program stored in Auto TimeAdjust Software Storage Area 2069a. When the power of CommunicationDevice 200 is turned on (S1), CPU 211 (FIG. 1) stores a predeterminedtimer value in Auto Time Data Storage Area 2069c (S2). The timer valueis decremented periodically (S3). When the timer value equals to zero(S4), the automatic timer adjust function is activated (S5) and CPU 211performs the sequence described hereinbefore, and the sequence of S2through S4 is repeated thereafter.

<<Video/Photo Mode>>

This paragraph illustrates the details of CCD Unit 214 (FIG. 1). In thisembodiment, CCD Unit 214 is mounted on Rotator 291 (not shown) which isrotatably connected to the side of Communication Device 200. Indicator212 (FIG. 1) is attached to the surface of CCD Unit 214.

This paragraph illustrates the software program installed inCommunication Device 200 to initiate the present function. First of all,a list of modes is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). When an inputsignal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system to select a specific mode (S2), the selected mode isactivated. In the present example, the communication mode is activated(S3a) when the communication mode is selected in the previous step, thegame download mode and the game play mode are activated (S3b) when thegame download mode and the game play mode are selected in the previousstep of which the details are described hereinbefore, and thevideo/photo mode is activated (S3c) when the video/photo mode isselected in the previous step. The modes displayed on LCD 201 in S1which are selectable in S2 and S3 may include all functions and modesexplained in this specification. Once the selected mode is activated,another mode can be activated while the first activated mode is stillimplemented by going through the steps of S1 through S3 for anothermode, thereby enabling a plurality of functions and modes beingperformed simultaneously (S4).

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in RAM 206 (FIG. 1). In thisembodiment, the data to activate (as described in S3a of the previousparagraph) and to perform the communication mode is stored inCommunication Data Storage Area 2061a, the data to activate (asdescribed in S3b of the previous paragraph) and to perform the gamedownload mode and the game play mode are stored in Game DL/Play DataStorage Area 2061b/2061c of which the details are describedhereinbefore, and the data to activate (as described in S3c of theprevious paragraph) and to perform the video/photo mode is stored inVideo/Photo Data Storage Area 20610a.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs and data stored inVideo/Photo Data Storage Area 20610a. In this embodiment, Video/PhotoData Storage Area 20610a includes Video/Photo Software Storage Area20610b, Video Data Storage Area 20610c, Audio Data Storage Area 20610d,Photo Data Storage Area 20610e, Photo Sound Data Storage Area 20610f,and Indicator Data Storage Area 20610g. Video/Photo Software StorageArea 20610b stores the software programs described hereinafter. VideoData Storage Area 20610c stores the data described hereinafter. AudioData Storage Area 20610d stores the data described hereinafter. PhotoData Storage Area 20610e stores the data described hereinafter. PhotoSound Data Storage Area 20610f stores a sound data (preferably a wavedata) producing a sound similar to the one when a conventional camera isactivated. Indicator Data Storage Area 20610g stores the data describedhereinafter. Video Data Storage Area 20610c and Audio Data Storage Area20610d primarily stores the similar data stored in Area 267 (not shown)and Area 268 (not shown), respectively.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Video Data Storage Area20610c. Video Data Storage Area 20610c stores a plurality of video datawhich goes through the process described hereinafter. In the presentexample, six video data, i.e., Video #1, Video #2, Video #3, Video #4,Video #5, and Video #6, are currently stored in Video Data Storage Area20610c. Message Data Storage Area (MS2a , MS3a) 20610h is also includedin Video Data Storage Area 20610c, which stores the text data of MS2a(‘REC’) and MS3a (‘STOP’).

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Audio Data Storage Area20610d. Audio Data Storage Area 20610d stores a plurality of audio datawhich goes through the process described hereinafter. In the presentexample, six audio data, i.e., Audio #1, Audio #2, Audio #3, Audio #4,Audio #5, and Audio #6 are currently stored in Audio Data Storage Area20610d. Each audio data stored in Audio Data Storage Area 20610dcorresponds to the video data stored in Video Data Storage Area 20610c.Namely, Video #1 corresponds to Audio #1, Video #2 corresponds to Audio#2, Video #3 corresponds to Audio #3, Video #4 corresponds to Audio #4,Video #5 corresponds to Audio #5, and Video #6 corresponds to Audio #6.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Photo Data Storage Area20610e. Photo Data Storage Area 20610e stores a plurality of photo datawhich goes through the process described hereinafter. In the presentexample, six photo data, i.e., Photo #1, Photo #2, Photo #3, Photo #4,Photo #5, and Photo #6 are currently stored in Photo Data Storage Area20610e. Message Data Storage Area (MS4a) 20610i is also included inPhoto Data Storage Area 20610e, which stores the text data of MS4a(‘SHOT’).

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Indicator Data StorageArea 20610g. Indicator Data Storage Area 20610g stores the dataregarding the color of Indicator 212 (FIG. 1) when Communication Device200 is in a video mode or a photo mode. In this embodiment, Indicator212 emits red light when Communication Device 200 is in the video modeand green light when Communication Device 200 is in the photo mode.

This paragraph illustrates another example of the data stored inIndicator Data Storage Area 20610g. In this embodiment, Indicator 212emits a predetermined color, however, with a different pattern. Namely,the light emitted from Indicator 212 turns on and off when CommunicationDevice 200 is in the video mode, whereas the light remains on whenCommunication Device 200 is in the photo mode.

This paragraph illustrates the software program stored in Video/PhotoSoftware Storage Area 20610b. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1)displays a list of the selectable modes, i.e., the video mode and thephoto mode (S1). One of the modes is selected by utilizing Input Device210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S2).

This paragraph illustrates the software program stored in Video/PhotoSoftware Storage Area 20610b. When the video mode is selected in S2hereinbefore, the video mode is initiated and CPU 211 (FIG. 1) is readyto capture and store the video data in one of the areas of Video DataStorage Area 20610c (S1). Next, the video process is initiated which isdescribed in details hereinafter (S2a) until a specific signal is inputby utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S3). The indicator process is activated simultaneously which isdescribed in details hereinafter (S2b).

This paragraph illustrates the video process of Communication Device200, i.e., S2a explained hereinbefore. In this embodiment, the videodata input from CCD Unit 214 (FIG. 1) (S1a) is converted from analogdata to digital data (S2a) and is processed by Video Processor 202(FIG. 1) (S3a). The processed video data is stored in Video Data StorageArea 20610c (S4a) and is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S5a). In thisembodiment, the audio data input from Microphone 215 (FIG. 1) (S1b) isconverted from analog data to digital data by A/D 213 (FIG. 1) (S2b) andis processed by Sound Processor 205 (FIG. 1) (S3b). The processed audiodata is stored in Audio Data Storage Area 20610d (S4b) and istransferred to Sound Processor 205 and is output from Speaker 216(FIG. 1) via D/A 204 (FIG. 1) (S5b). The sequences of S1a through S5aand S1b through S5b are continued until a specific signal indicating tostop such sequence is input from Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or by thevoice recognition system (S6).

This paragraph illustrates the indicator process of Communication Device200, i.e., S2b explained hereinbefore. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) scans the video mode section of Indicator Data Storage Area20610g and retrieves the indicator data therefrom (S1) and activatesIndicator 212 (FIG. 1) in accordance with the indicator data (S2). Inthe embodiment explained hereinbefore. Indicator 212 emits red lightwhile Communication Device 200 is in the video mode and Indicator 212turns on and off in the embodiment explained hereinbefore. The sequencesof S1 and S2 is continued until a specific signal indicating to stopsuch sequence is input from Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or by the voicerecognition system (S3).

This paragraph illustrates the sequence to transfer the video data andthe audio data via Antenna 218 (FIG. 1) in a wireless fashion. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) initiates a dialing process (S1) until theline is connected to a host (not shown) (S2). As soon as the line isconnected, CPU 211 reads the video data and the audio data stored inVideo Data Storage Area 20610c and Audio Data Storage Area 20610d (S3)and transfers these data to Signal Processor 208 (FIG. 1) where thesedata are converted into a transferring data (S4). The transferring datais transferred from Antenna 218 (FIG. 1) in a wireless fashion (S5). Thesequence of S1 through S5 is continued until a specific signalindicating to stop such sequence is input from Input Device 210 (FIG. 1)or via the voice recognition system (S6). The line is disconnectedthereafter (S7).

This paragraph illustrates the basic structure of the transferred datawhich is transferred from Communication Device 200 as described in S4and S5 explained hereinbefore. Transferred Data 610a is primarilycomposed of Header 611a, Video Data 612a, Audio Data 613a, Relevant Data614a, and Footer 615a. Video data 612a corresponds to the video datastored in Video Data Storage Area 20610c, and Audio Data 613acorresponds to the audio data stored in Audio Data Storage Area 20610d.Relevant Data 614a includes various types of data, such as theidentification numbers of Device A (i.e., the transferor device) andDevice B (i.e., the transferee device), a location data which representsthe location of Device A, an email data transferred from Device A toDevice B, etc. Header 611a and Footer 615a represent the beginning andthe end of Transferred Data 610a respectively.

This paragraph illustrates the data contained in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) ofDevice B (i.e., the transferee device). In this embodiment, RAM 206includes Area 269 a which stores video data, Area 270 a which storesaudio data, and Area 266 a which is a work area utilized for the processexplained hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the software program stored in Device B. Inthis embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Device B initiates a dialingprocess (S1) until Device B is connected to a host (not shown) (S2).Transferred Data 610a is received by Antenna 218 (FIG. 1) of Device B(S3) and is converted by Signal Processor 208 (FIG. 1) into datareadable by CPU 211 (S4). Video data and audio data are retrieved fromTransferred Data 610a and stored into Area 269a and Area 270a of RAM 206respectively (S5). The video data stored in Area 269a is processed byVideo Processor 202 (FIG. 1) (S6a). The processed video data isconverted into an analog data (S7a) and displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)(S8a). S7a may not be necessary depending on the type of LCD 201 used.The audio data stored in Area 270a is processed by Sound Processor 205(FIG. 1) (S6b). The processed audio data is converted into analog databy D/A 204 (FIG. 1) (S7b) and output from Speaker 216 (FIG. 1) (S8b).The sequences of S6a through S8a and S6b through S8b are continued untila specific signal indicating to stop such sequence is input by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via the voice recognition system (S9).

In this embodiment, Message MS1a is shown at the upper right corner ofLCD 201 (FIG. 1) indicating that a new email has arrived whilevideo/photo mode is implemented.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Email Data CalculatingArea 206c (not shown) and Email Data Storage Area 206d (not shown) inorder to implement the incoming message function. Email Data CalculatingArea 206c includes Incoming Message Calculating Area 206k which stores asoftware program described hereinafter, and Email Data Storage Area 206dincludes Message Data Storage Area (MS1a) 206ma which stores the textdata of MS1a (in the present example, the text data ‘Email’).

This paragraph illustrates the software program stored in IncomingMessage Calculating Area 206k. First of all, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) checkswhether a new incoming message has arrived by scanning Email DataStorage Area 206d (S1). If a new message has arrived (S2), CPU 211retrieves the text data (MS1a) from Message Data Storage Area (MS1a)206ma and displays on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) for a specified period of time(S3). The software program is executed periodically with a fixedinterval.

In this embodiment, Message MS2a is shown on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) when thevideo recording function is implemented, and Message MS3a is shown whenthe implementation of the video recording function has been terminated.

This paragraph illustrates the software program stored in Video/PhotoSoftware Storage Area 20610b to display messages MS2a and MS3a on LCD201 (FIG. 1). When a start recording signal has been input by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system, CPU 211(FIG. 1) initiates the recording process, i.e., the process describedhereinbefore hereinbefore (S1). During the recording process, the textdata of Message MS2a is retrieved from Message Data Storage Area (MS2a ,MS3a) 20610h and displayed at the upper right corner of LCD 201 (FIG. 1)indicating that the video recording function is in process (S2). If thestop recording signal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) orvia voice recognition system indicating to stop the video recordingprocess (S3), CPU 211 stops the video recording process (S4), andretrieves the text data of Message MS3a from Message Data Storage Area(MS2a , MS3a) 20610h and displays at the upper right corner of LCD 201for a specified period of time (S5). Since Video Data Storage Area20610c and Audio Data Storage Area 20610d are divided into severalsectors as stated above, a plurality of software program described inthis embodiment can be activated to record and store a plurality ofvideo data and the corresponding audio data simultaneously.

This paragraph illustrates the software program stored in Video/PhotoSoftware Storage Area 20610b to playback the recorded video data and thecorresponding audio data. First, a video data is selected and playbacksignal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system (S1). Once these signals are received, CPU 211(FIG. 1) initiates the playback process of the recorded video data,i.e., CPU 211 retrieves the selected video data from Video Data StorageArea 20610c and the corresponding audio data from Audio Data StorageArea 20610d, and Video Processor 202 (FIG. 1) processes the channel datato be displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). This playback processcontinues until a stop playback signal is input by utilizing InputDevice 210 or via voice recognition system (S3). When a stop playbacksignal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 or via voice recognitionsystem, CPU 211 stops the foregoing process, and retrieves the text dataof Message MS3a from Message Data Storage Area (MS2a , MS3a) 20610h anddisplays at the upper right corner of LCD 201 for a specified period oftime (S4).

This paragraph illustrates the software program stored in Video/PhotoSoftware Storage Area 20610b. When the photo mode is selected in S2hereinbefore, the photo mode is initiated and CPU 211 (FIG. 1) is readyto capture and store the photo data in one of the areas of Photo DataStorage Area 20610e (S1). Next, the photo process is initiated which isdescribed in details hereinafter (S2a) until a specific signal is inputby utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S3). The indicator process is activated simultaneously which isdescribed in details hereinafter (S2b).

In this embodiment, Message MS4a is shown on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) when aphoto is taken with Communication Device 200.

This paragraph illustrates the software program stored in Video/PhotoSoftware Storage Area 20610b to implement the photo mode. When a startrecording signal has been input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1)or via voice recognition system (S1), CPU 211 (FIG. 1) initiates therecording process, i.e., retrieves an image data input from CCD Unit 214(FIG. 1), which is currently displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1), and storesin one of the sectors of Photo Data Storage Area 20610e, for examplePhoto #1 described hereinbefore (S2). CPU 211 retrieves the text data ofMessage MS4a from Message Data Storage Area (MS4a) 20610i and displaysat the upper right corner of LCD 201 (FIG. 1) for a specific period oftime indicating that a photo data has been taken and stored (S3). ThenCPU 211 retrieves the photo data which is just stored in Photo DataStorage Area 20610e, and Video Processor 202 (FIG. 1) processes thephoto data to be displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) for a specific period oftime (S4). Since Photo Data Storage Area 20610e is divided into severalsectors as stated above, S1 from S4 can be repeated to record and storea plurality of image data.

This paragraph illustrates the software program stored in Video/PhotoSoftware Storage Area 20610b to display the recorded photo data. First,a photo data is selected by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or viavoice recognition system (S1). When this signal is received, CPU 211(FIG. 1) initiates the display process of the recorded photo data, i.e.,CPU 211 retrieves the selected photo data from Photo Data Storage Area20610e, for example Photo #1 described hereinbefore, and Video Processor202 (FIG. 1) processes the selected photo data to be displayed on LCD201 (FIG. 1) (S2). The photo data is displayed until a close signal isinput by utilizing Input Device 210 or via voice recognition system(S3). When a close signal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 or viavoice recognition system, CPU 211 terminates to display the photo data(S4).

This paragraph illustrates the software program stored in Video/PhotoSoftware Storage Area 20610b which implements the indicator process ofCommunication Device 200, i.e., S2b explained hereinbefore. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) scans the photo mode section of IndicatorData Storage Area 20610g and retrieves an indicator data therefrom (S1)and activate Indicator 212 (FIG. 1) in accordance with the indicatordata (S2). In the embodiment explained hereinbefore, Indicator 212 emitsgreen light while Communication Device 200 is in the photo mode andIndicator 212 remains to be on in the embodiment explained hereinbefore.The sequence of S1 through S2 is continued until a specific signalindicating to stop such sequence is input from Input Device 210 (FIG. 1)or by the voice recognition system (S3).

<<Calculator Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the calculator function ofCommunication Device 200. Communication Device 200 can be utilized as acalculator to perform mathematical calculation by implementing thepresent function.

This paragraph illustrates the software program installed in eachCommunication Device 200 to initiate the present function. First of all,a list of modes is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). When an inputsignal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system to select a specific mode (S2), the selected mode isactivated. In the present example, the communication mode is activated(S3a) when the communication mode is selected in the previous step, thegame download mode and the game play mode are activated (S3b) when thegame download mode and the game play mode are selected in the previousstep of which the details are described hereinbefore, and the calculatorfunction is activated (S3c) when the calculator function is selected inthe previous step. The modes displayed on LCD 201 in S1 which areselectable in S2 and S3 may include all functions and modes explained inthis specification. Once the selected mode is activated, another modecan be activated while the first activated mode is still implemented bygoing through the steps of S1 through S3 for another mode, therebyenabling a plurality of functions and modes being performedsimultaneously (S4).

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in RAM 206 (FIG. 1). In thisembodiment, the data to activate (as described in S3a of the previousparagraph) and to perform the communication mode is stored inCommunication Data Storage Area 2061a, the data to activate (asdescribed in S3b of the previous paragraph) and to perform the gamedownload mode and the game play mode are stored in Game DL/Play DataStorage Area 2061b/2061c of which the details are describedhereinbefore, and the data to activate (as described in S3c of theprevious paragraph) and to perform the calculator function is stored inCalculator Information Storage Area 20615a.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Calculator InformationStorage Area 20615a. In this embodiment, Calculator Information StorageArea 20615a includes Calculator Software Storage Area 20615b andCalculator Data Storages Area 20615c. Calculator Software Storage Area20615b stores the software programs to implement the present function,such as the one explained hereinafter, and Calculator Data Storage Area20615c stores a plurality of data necessary to execute the softwareprograms stored in Calculator Software Storage Area 20615b and toimplement the present function.

This paragraph illustrates the software program stored in CalculatorStorage Area 20615b. In this embodiment, one or more of numeric data areinput by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognitionsystem as well as the arithmetic operators (e.g., ‘+’, ‘−’, and ‘x’),which are temporarily stored in Calculator Data Storage Area 20615c(S1). By utilizing the data stored in Calculator Data Storage Area20615c, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) performs the calculation by executing thesoftware program stored in Calculator Software Storage Area 20615b (S2).The result of the calculation is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)thereafter (S3).

<<Spreadsheet Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the spreadsheet function ofCommunication Device 200. Here, the spreadsheet is composed of aplurality of cells which are aligned in matrix. In other words, thespreadsheet is divided into a plurality of rows and columns in whichalphanumeric data is capable to be input. Microsoft Excel is the typicalexample of the spreadsheet.

This paragraph illustrates the software program installed in eachCommunication Device 200 to initiate the present function. First of all,a list of modes is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). When an inputsignal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system to select a specific mode (S2), the selected mode isactivated. In the present example, the communication mode is activated(S3a) when the communication mode is selected in the previous step, thegame download mode and the game play mode are activated (S3b) when thegame download mode and the game play mode are selected in the previousstep of which the details are described hereinbefore, and thespreadsheet function is activated (S3c) when the spreadsheet function isselected in the previous step. The modes displayed on LCD 201 in S1which are selectable in S2 and S3 may include all functions and modesexplained in this specification. Once the selected mode is activated,another mode can be activated while the first activated mode is stillimplemented by going through the steps of S1 through S3 for anothermode, thereby enabling a plurality of functions and modes beingperformed simultaneously (S4).

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in RAM 206 (FIG. 1). In thisembodiment, the data to activate (as described in S3a of the previousparagraph) and to perform the communication mode is stored inCommunication Data Storage Area 2061a, the data to activate (asdescribed in S3b of the previous paragraph) and to perform the gamedownload mode and the game play mode are stored in Game DL/Play DataStorage Area 2061b/2061c of which the details are describedhereinbefore, and the data to activate (as described in S3c of theprevious paragraph) and to perform the spreadsheet function is stored inSpreadsheet Information Storage Area 20616a.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Spreadsheet InformationStorage Area 20616a. In this embodiment, Spreadsheet Information StorageArea 20616a includes Spreadsheet Software Storage Area 20616b andSpreadsheet Data Storage Area 20616c. Spreadsheet Software Storage Area20616b stores the software programs to implement the present function,such as the one explained hereinafter, and Spreadsheet Data Storage Area20616c stores a plurality of data necessary to execute the softwareprograms stored in Spreadsheet Software Storage Area 20616b and toimplement the present function.

This paragraph illustrates the software program stored in SpreadsheetSoftware Storage Area 20616b. In this embodiment, a certain cell of aplurality of cells displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) is selected byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system. Theselected cell is highlighted by a certain manner, and CPU 211 (FIG. 1)stores the location of the selected cell in Spreadsheet Data StorageArea 20616c (S1). One or more of alphanumeric data are input byutilizing Input Device 210 or via voice recognition system into the cellselected in S1, and CPU 211 stores the alphanumeric data in SpreadsheetData Storage Area 20616c (S2). CPU 211 displays the alphanumeric data onLCD 201 thereafter (S3). The sequence of S1 through S3 can be repeatedfor a numerous amount of times and saved and closed thereafter.

<<Word Processing Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the word processing function ofCommunication Device 200. By way of implementing such function,Communication Device 200 can be utilized as a word processor which hasthe similar functions to Microsoft Words. The word processing functionprimarily includes the following functions: the bold formattingfunction, the italic formatting function, the image pasting function,the font formatting function, the spell check function, the underliningfunction, the page numbering function, and the bullets and numberingfunction. Here, the bold formatting function makes the selectedalphanumeric data bold. The italic formatting function makes theselected alphanumeric data italic. The image pasting function pastes theselected image to a document to the selected location. The fontformatting function changes the selected alphanumeric data to theselected font. The spell check function fixes spelling and grammaticalerrors of the alphanumeric data in the document. The underliningfunction adds underlines to the selected alphanumeric data. The pagenumbering function adds page numbers to each page of a document at theselected location. The bullets and numbering function adds the selectedtype of bullets and numbers to the selected paragraphs.

This paragraph illustrates the software program installed in eachCommunication Device 200 to initiate the present function. First of all,a list of modes is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). When an inputsignal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system to select a specific mode (S2), the selected mode isactivated. In the present example, the communication mode is activated(S3a) when the communication mode is selected in the previous step, thegame download mode and the game play mode are activated (S3b) when thegame download mode and the game play mode are selected in the previousstep of which the details are described hereinbefore, and the wordprocessing function is activated (S3c) when the word processing functionis selected in the previous step. The modes displayed on LCD 201 in S1which are selectable in S2 and S3 may include all functions and modesexplained in this specification. Once the selected mode is activated,another mode can be activated while the first activated mode is stillimplemented by going through the steps of S1 through S3 for anothermode, thereby enabling a plurality of functions and modes beingperformed simultaneously (S4).

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in RAM 206 (FIG. 1). In thisembodiment, the data to activate (as described in S3a of the previousparagraph) and to perform the communication mode is stored inCommunication Data Storage Area 2061a, the data to activate (asdescribed in S3b of the previous paragraph) and to perform the gamedownload mode and the game play mode are stored in Game DL/Play DataStorage Area 2061b/2061c of which the details are describedhereinbefore, and the data to activate (as described in S3c of theprevious paragraph) and to perform the word processing function isstored in Word Processing Information Storage Area 20617a.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Word ProcessingInformation Storage Area 20617a. In this embodiment, Word ProcessingInformation Storage Area 20617a includes Word Processing SoftwareStorage Area 20617b and Word Processing Data Storage Area 20617c. Wordprocessing Software Storage Area 20617b stores the software programsdescribed hereinafter, and Word Processing Data Storage Area 20617cstores a plurality of data described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in WordProcessing Software Storage Area 20617b. In this embodiment, WordProcessing Software Storage Area 20617b stores Alphanumeric Data InputSoftware 20617b1, Bold Formatting Software 20617b2, Italic FormattingSoftware 20617b3, Image Pasting Software 20617b4, Font FormattingSoftware 20617b5, Spell Check Software 20617b6, Underlining Software20617b7, Page Numbering Software 20617b8, and Bullets And NumberingSoftware 20617b9. Alphanumeric Data Input Software 20617b1 inputs to adocument a series of alphanumeric data in accordance to the inputsignals produced by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system. Bold Formatting Software 20617b2 implements the boldformatting function which makes the selected alphanumeric data bold ofwhich the sequence is described hereinafter. Italic Formatting Software20617b3 implements the italic formatting function which makes theselected alphanumeric data italic of which the sequence is describedhereinafter. Image Pasting Software 20617b4 implements the image pastingfunction which pastes the selected image to a document to the selectedlocation of which the sequence is described hereinafter. Font FormattingSoftware 20617b5 implements the font formatting function which changesthe selected alphanumeric data to the selected font of which thesequence is described hereinafter. Spell Check Software 20617b6implements the spell check function which fixes spelling and grammaticalerrors of the alphanumeric data in a document of which the sequence isdescribed hereinafter. Underlining Software 20617b7 implements theunderlining function which adds the selected underlines to the selectedalphanumeric data of which the sequence is described hereinafter. PageNumbering Software 20617b8 implements the page numbering function whichadds page numbers at the selected location to each page of a document ofwhich the sequence is described hereinafter. Bullets And NumberingSoftware 20617b9 implements the bullets and numbering function whichadds the selected type of bullets and numbers to the selected paragraphsof which the sequence is described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Word Processing DataStorage Area 20617c. In this embodiment, Word Processing Data StorageArea 20617c includes Alphanumeric Data Storage Area 20617c1, BoldFormatting Data Storage Area 20617c2, Italic Formatting Data StorageArea 20617c3, Image Data Storage Area 20617c4, Font Formatting DataStorage Area 20617c5, Spell Check Data Storage Area 20617c6, UnderliningData Storage Area 20617c7, Page Numbering Data Storage Area 20617c8, andBullets And Numbering Data Storage Area 20617c9. Alphanumeric DataStorage Area 20617c1 stores the basic text and numeric data which arenot decorated by bold and/or italic (the default font may be couriernew). Bold Formatting Data Storage Area 20617c2 stores the text andnumeric data which are decorated by bold. Italic Formatting Data StorageArea 20617c3 stores the text and numeric data which are decorated byitalic. Image Data Storage Area 20617c4 stores the data representing thelocation of the image data pasted in a document and the image dataitself. Font Formatting Data Storage Area 20617c5 stores a plurality oftypes of fonts, such as arial, century, courier new, tahoma, and timesnew roman, of all text and numeric data stored in Alphanumeric DataStorage Area 20617c1. Spell check Data Storage Area 20617c6 stores aplurality of spell check data, i.e., a plurality of correct text andnumeric data for purposes of being compared with the alphanumeric datainput in a document and a plurality of pattern data for purposes ofchecking the grammatical errors therein. Underlining Data Storage Area20617c7 stores a plurality of data representing underlines of differenttypes. Page Numbering Data Storage Area 20617c8 stores the datarepresenting the location of page numbers to be displayed in a documentand the page number of each page of a document. Bullets And NumberingData Storage Area 20617c9 stores a plurality of data representingdifferent types of bullets and numbering and the location which they areadded.

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of the software program storedin Alphanumeric Data Input Software 20617b1. In this embodiment, aplurality of alphanumeric data is input by utilizing Input Device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). The correspondingalphanumeric data is retrieved from Alphanumeric Data Storage Area20617c1 (S2), and the document including the alphanumeric data retrievedin S2 is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S3).

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of the software program storedin Bold Formatting Software 20617b2. In this embodiment, one or more ofalphanumeric data are selected by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) orvia voice recognition system (S1). Next, a bold formatting signal isinput by utilizing Input Device 210 (e.g., selecting a specific icondisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) or selecting a specific item from apulldown menu) or via voice recognition system (S2). CPU 211 (FIG. 1)then retrieves the bold formatting data from Bold Formatting DataStorage Area 20617c2 (S3), and replaces the alphanumeric data selectedin S1 with the bold formatting data retrieved in S3 (S4). The documentwith the replaced bold formatting data is displayed on LCD 201thereafter (S5).

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of the software program storedin Italic Formatting Software 20617b3. In this embodiment, one or moreof alphanumeric data are selected by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1)or via voice recognition system (S1). Next, an italic formatting signalis input by utilizing Input Device 210 (e.g., selecting a specific icondisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) or selecting a specific item from apulldown menu) or via voice recognition system (S2). CPU 211 (FIG. 1)then retrieves the italic formatting data from Italic Formatting DataStorage Area 20617c3 (S3), and replaces the alphanumeric data selectedin S1 with the italic formatting data retrieved in S3 (S4). The documentwith the replaced italic formatting data is displayed on LCD 201thereafter (S5).

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of the software program storedin Image Pasting Software 20617b4. In this embodiment, the image to bepasted is selected by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system (S1). Here, the image may be of any type, such asJPEG, GIF, and TIFF. Next the location in a document where the image isto be pasted is selected by utilizing Input Device 210 or via voicerecognition system (S2). The data representing the location is stored inImage Pasting Data Storage Area 20617c4. The image is pasted at thelocation selected in S2 and the image is stored in Image Pasting DataStorage Area 20617c4 (S3). The document with the pasted image isdisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) thereafter (S4).

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of the software program storedin Font Formatting Software 20617b5. In this embodiment, one or more ofalphanumeric data are selected by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) orvia voice recognition system (S1). Next, a font formatting signal isinput by utilizing Input Device 210 (e.g., selecting a specific icondisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) or selecting a specific item from apulldown menu) or via voice recognition system (S2). CPU 211 (FIG. 1)then retrieves the font formatting data from Italic Formatting DataStorage Area 20617c5 (S3), and replaces the alphanumeric data selectedin S1 with the font formatting data retrieved in S3 (S4). The documentwith the replaced font formatting data is displayed on LCD 201thereafter (S5).

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of the software program storedin Spell Check Software 20617b6. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1)scans all alphanumeric data in a document (S1). CPU 211 then comparesthe alphanumeric data with the spell check data stored in Spell CheckData Storage Area 20617c6, i.e., a plurality of correct text and numericdata for purposes of being compared with the alphanumeric data input ina document and a plurality of pattern data for purposes of checking thegrammatical errors therein (S2). CPU 211 corrects the alphanumeric dataand/or corrects the grammatical errors (S3), and the document with thecorrected alphanumeric data is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S4).

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of the software program storedin Underlining Software 20617b7. In this embodiment, one or more ofalphanumeric data are selected by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) orvia voice recognition system (S1). Next, an underlining signal is inputby utilizing Input Device 210 (e.g., selecting a specific icon displayedon LCD 201 (FIG. 1) or selecting a specific item from a pulldown menu)or via voice recognition system to select the type of the underline tobe added (S2). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then retrieves the underlining data fromUnderlining Data Storage Area 20617c7 (S3), and adds to the alphanumericdata selected in S1 (S4). The document with underlines added to theselected alphanumeric data is displayed on LCD 201 thereafter (S5).

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of the software program storedin Page Numbering Software 20617b8. In this embodiment, a page numberingsignal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system (S1). Next, the location to display the page numberis selected by utilizing Input Device 210 or via voice recognitionsystem (S2). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then stores the location of the pagenumber to be displayed in Page Numbering Storage Area 20617c8, and addsthe page number to each page of a document at the selected location(S3). The document with page numbers is displayed on LCD 201 thereafter(S4).

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of the software program storedin Bullets And Numbering Software 20617b9. In this embodiment, aparagraph is selected by utilizing input device 210 (FIG. 1) or viavoice recognition system (S1). Next, the type of the bullets and/ornumbering is selected by utilizing Input Device 210 or via voicerecognition system (S2). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then stores the identificationdata of the paragraph selected in S1 and the type of the bullets and/ornumbering in Bullets And Numbering Data Storage Area 20617c9, and addsthe bullets and/or numbering to the selected paragraph of a document(S3). The document with the bullets and/or numbering is displayed on LCD201 thereafter (S4).

<<Start Up Software Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the start up software programfunction which enables Communication Device 200 to automaticallyactivate (or start up) the registered software programs when the poweris on.

This paragraph illustrates the overall sequence of the present function.In this embodiment, the user of Communication Device 200 presses thepower button of Communication Device 200 (S1). Then the predeterminedsoftware programs automatically activate (or start up) without havingany instructions from the user of Communication Device 200 (S2).

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included RAM 206 (FIG. 1).In this embodiment, RAM 206 includes Start Up Information Storage Area20621a which is described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Start UpInformation Storage Area 20621a. In this embodiment, Start UpInformation Storage Area 20621a includes Start Up Software Storage Area20621b and Start Up Data Storage Area 20621c. Start Up Software StorageArea 20621b stores the software programs necessary to implement thepresent function, such as the ones described hereinafter. Start Up DataStorage Area 20621c stores the data necessary to implement the presentfunction, such as the ones described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in Start UpSoftware Storage Area 20621b. In this embodiment, Start Up SoftwareStorage Area 20621b stores Power On Detecting Software 20621b1, Start UpData Storage Area Scanning Software 20621b2, and Start Up SoftwareActivating Software 20621b3. Power On Detecting Software 20621b1 detectswhether the power of Communication Device 200 is on of which thesequence is described hereinafter, Start Up Data Storage Area ScanningSoftware 20621b2 identifies the software programs which areautomatically activated of which the sequence is described hereinafter,and Start Up Software Activating Software 20621b3 activates theidentified software programs identified by Start Up Data Storage AreaScanning Software 20621b2 of which the sequence is describedhereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in Start Up DataStorage Area 20621c. In this embodiment, Start Up Data Storage Area20621c includes Start Up Software Index Storage Area 20621c1. Here,Start Up Software Index Storage Area 20621c1 stores the software programindexes, wherein a software program index is an unique informationassigned to each software program as an identifier (e.g., title of asoftware program) of which the details are explained hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Start Up Software IndexStorage Area 20621c1. In this embodiment, Start Up Software IndexStorage Area 20621c1 stores the software program indexes of the softwareprograms which are automatically activated by the present function.Here, the software programs may be any software programs explained inthis specification, and the storage areas where these software programsare stored are explained in the relevant paragraphs thereto. Threesoftware program indexes, i.e., Start Up Software Index 20621c1a, StartUp Software Index 20621c1b, and Start Up Software Index 20621c1c, arestored in Start Up Software Index Storage Area 20621c1 in the presentexample. The software program indexes can be created and store in StartUp Software Index Storage Area 20621c1 manually by utilizing inputdevice 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system.

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of Power On Detecting Software20621b1 stored in Start Up Software Storage Area 20621b. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) checks the status of the power condition ofCommunication Device 200 (S1). When the user of Communication Device 200powers on Communication Device 200 by utilizing input device 210 (FIG.1), such as by pressing a power button (S2), CPU 211 activates Start UpData Storage Area Scanning Software 20621b2 of which the sequence isexplained hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of Start Up Data Storage AreaScanning Software 20621b2 stored in Start Up Software Storage Area20621b. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) scans Start Up SoftwareIndex Storage Area 20621c1 (S1), and identifies the software programswhich are automatically activated (S2). CPU 211 activates Start UpSoftware Activating Software 20621b3 thereafter of which the sequence isexplained hereinafter (S3).

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of Start Up Software ActivatingSoftware 20621b3 stored in Start Up Software Storage Area 20621b. Inthis embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) activates the software programs ofwhich the software program indexes are identified in S2 explainedhereinbefore (S1).

This paragraph illustrates another embodiment wherein the three softwareprograms stored in Start Up Software Storage Area 20621b (i.e., Power OnDetecting Software 20621b1, Start Up Data Storage Area Scanning Software20621b2, Start Up Software Activating Software 20621b3) is integratedinto one software program stored therein. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) checks the status of the power condition of CommunicationDevice 200 (S1). When the user of Communication Device 200 powers onCommunication Device 200 by utilizing input device 210 (FIG. 1), such asby pressing a power button (S2), CPU 211 scans Start Up Software IndexStorage Area 20621c1 (S3), and identifies the software programs whichare automatically activated (S4). CPU 211 activates the softwareprograms thereafter of which the software program indexes are identifiedin S4 (S5).

As another embodiment, the software programs per se (not the softwareprogram indexes as described hereinbefore) may be stored in a specificstorage area which are activated by the present function.

As another embodiment, the present function may be implemented at thetime the user of Communication Device 200 logs on instead of at the timethe Communication Device 200 is powered as described in S2 explainedhereinbefore.

<<Stereo Audio Data Output Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the stereo audio data outputfunction which enables Communication Device 200 to output audio datafrom Speakers 216L and 216R (not shown) in a stereo fashion.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in Host DataStorage Area H00c of Host H. In this embodiment, Host Data Storage AreaH00c includes Stereo Audio Information Storage Area H22a. Stereo AudioInformation Storage Area H22a stores the software programs and datanecessary to implement the present function as described in detailshereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Stereo AudioInformation Storage Area H22a. In this embodiment, Stereo AudioInformation Storage Area H22a includes Stereo Audio Software StorageArea H22b and Stereo Audio Data Storage Area H22c. Stereo Audio SoftwareStorage Area H22b stores the software programs necessary to implementthe present function, such as the one described hereinafter. StereoAudio Data Storage Area H22c stores the data necessary to implement thepresent function, such as the ones described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the stereo audio data stored in Stereo AudioData Storage Area H22c. A plurality of stereo audio data are stored inStereo Audio Data Storage Area H22c. In this embodiment, three stereoaudio data, i.e., Stereo Audio Data H22c1, Stereo Audio Data H22c2, andStereo Audio Data H22c3 are stored therein.

This paragraph illustrates the components of the stereo audio datastored in Stereo Audio Data Storage Area H22c. This paragraph describesthe components of Stereo Audio Data H22c1 as an example. In thisembodiment, Stereo Audio Data H22c1 includes Left Speaker Audio DataH22c1L, Right Speaker Audio Data H22c1R, and Stereo Audio Data OutputTiming Data H22c1T. Left Speaker Audio Data H22c1L is an audio datawhich is designed to be output from Speaker 216L (not shown). RightSpeaker Audio Data H22c1R is an audio data which is designed to beoutput from Speaker 216R (not shown). Stereo Audio Data Output TimingData H22c1T is a timing data which is utilized to synchronize the outputof both Left Speaker Audio Data H22c1L and Right Speaker Audio DataH22c1R from Speaker 216R and Speaker 216L respectively.

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of the software program storedin Stereo Audio Software Storage Area H22b. In this embodiment, thesoftware program stored in Stereo Audio Software Storage Area H22bextracts one of the stereo audio data stored in Stereo Audio DataStorage Area H22c and creates Transferred Stereo Audio Data TSAD forpurposes of transferring the extracted stereo audio data toCommunication Device 200 (S1).

This paragraph illustrates the components of Transferred Stereo AudioData TSAD created by the software program stored in Stereo AudioSoftware Storage Area H22b. In this embodiment, Transferred Stereo AudioData TSAD is composed of Header TSAD1, Com Device ID TSAD2, Host IDTSAD3, Transferred Stereo Audio Data TSAD4, and Footer TSAD5. Com DeviceID TSAD2 indicates the identification of Communication Device 200, HostID TSAD3 indicates the identification of Host H, and Transferred StereoAudio Data TSAD4 is the stereo audio data extracted in the mannerdescribed hereinbefore. Header TSAD1 and Footer TSAD5 indicate thebeginning and the end of Transferred Stereo Audio Data TSAD.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in RAM 206 (FIG. 1)of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, RAM 206 includes StereoAudio Information Storage Area 20622a. Stereo Audio Information StorageArea 20622a stores the software programs and data necessary to implementthe present function as described in details hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Stereo AudioInformation Storage Area 20622a. In this embodiment, Stereo AudioInformation Storage Area 20622a includes Stereo Audio Software StorageArea 20622b and Stereo Audio Data Storage Area 20622c. Stereo AudioSoftware Storage Area 20622b stores the software programs necessary toimplement the present function, such as the ones described hereinafter.Stereo Audio Data Storage Area 20622c stores the data necessary toimplement the present function, such as the ones described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the stereo audio data stored in Stereo AudioData Storage Area 20622c. A plurality of stereo audio data are stored inStereo Audio Data Storage Area 20622c. In this embodiment, three stereoaudio data, i.e., Stereo Audio Data 20622c1, Stereo Audio Data 20622c2,and Stereo Audio Data 20622c3 are stored therein.

This paragraph illustrates the components of the stereo audio datastored in Stereo Audio Data Storage Area 20622c. This paragraphdescribes the components of Stereo Audio Data 20622c1 as an example. Inthis embodiment, Stereo Audio Data 20622c1 includes Left Speaker AudioData 20622c1L, Right Speaker Audio Data 20622c1R, and Stereo Audio DataOutput Timing Data 20622c1T. Left Speaker Audio Data 20622c1L is anaudio data which is designed to be output from Speaker 216L (not shown).Right Speaker Audio Data 20622c1R is an audio data which is designed tobe output from Speaker 216R (not shown). Stereo Audio Data Output TimingData 20622c1T is a timing data which is utilized to synchronize theoutput of both Left Speaker Audio Data 20622c1L and Right Speaker AudioData 20622c1R from Speaker 216R and Speaker 216L respectively.

The downloaded stereo audio data are stored in specific area(s) ofStereo Audio Data Storage Area 20622c.

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of selecting and preparing tooutput the stereo audio data from Speakers 216L and 216R (not shown) ina stereo fashion. In this embodiment, a list of stereo audio data isdisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). The user of Communication Device 200selects one stereo audio data by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) orvia voice recognition system (S2). Assuming Stereo Audio Data 20622c1 isselected in S2, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) retrieves Left Speaker Audio Data20622c1L (S3), Right Speaker Audio Data 20622c1R (S4), and Stereo AudioData Output Timing Data 20622c1T from Stereo Audio Data Storage Area20622c (S5).

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of outputting the stereo audiodata from Speakers 216L and 216R (not shown) in a stereo fashion. Inthis embodiment, the user of Communication Device 200 inputs a specificsignal to output the stereo audio data by utilizing Input Device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). Assuming Audio Data20622c1 is selected in S2 explained hereinbefore, CPU 211 outputs LeftSpeaker Audio Data 20622c1L and Right Speaker Audio Data 20622c1R fromSpeakers 216L and 216R respectively in a stereo fashion in accordancewith Stereo Audio Data Output Timing Data 20622c1T (S2).

<<Stereo Visual Data Output Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the stereo visual data outputfunction which enables Communication Device 200 to output visual datafrom LCDs 201L and 201R (not shown) in a stereo fashion.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in Host DataStorage Area H00c (not shown) of Host H. In this embodiment, Host DataStorage Area H00c includes Stereo Visual Information Storage Area H23a.Stereo Visual Information Storage Area H23a stores the software programsand data necessary to implement the present function as described indetails hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Stereo VisualInformation Storage Area H23a. In this embodiment, Stereo VisualInformation Storage Area H23a includes Stereo Visual Software StorageArea H23b and Stereo Visual Data Storage Area H23c. Stereo VisualSoftware Storage Area H23b stores the software programs necessary toimplement the present function, such as the one described hereinafter.Stereo Visual Data Storage Area H23c stores the data necessary toimplement the present function, such as the ones described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the stereo visual data stored in StereoVisual Data Storage Area H23c. A plurality of stereo visual data arestored in Stereo Visual Data Storage Area H23c. In this embodiment,three stereo visual data, i.e., Stereo Visual Data H23c1, Stereo VisualData H23c2, and Stereo Visual Data H23c3 are stored therein.

This paragraph illustrates the components of the stereo visual datastored in Stereo Visual Data Storage Area H23c. This paragraph describesthe components of Stereo Visual Data H23c1 as an example. In thisembodiment, Stereo Visual Data H23c1 includes Left LCD Visual DataH23c1L, Right LCD Visual Data H23c1R, and Stereo Visual Data OutputTiming Data H23c1T. Left LCD Visual Data H23c1L is a visual data whichis designed to be output from LCD 201L (not shown). Right LCD VisualData H23c1R is a visual data which is designed to be output from LCD201R (not shown). Stereo Visual Data Output Timing Data H23c1T is atiming data which is utilized to synchronize the output of both Left LCDVisual Data H23c1L and Right LCD Visual Data H23c1R from LCD 201R andLCD 201L respectively.

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of the software program storedin Stereo Visual Software Storage Area H23b. In this embodiment, thesoftware program stored in Stereo Visual Software Storage Area H23bextracts one of the stereo visual data stored in Stereo Visual DataStorage Area H23c and creates Transferred Stereo Visual Data TSVD forpurposes of transferring the extracted stereo visual data toCommunication Device 200 (S1).

This paragraph illustrates the components of Transferred Stereo VisualData TSVD created by the software program stored in Stereo VisualSoftware Storage Area H23b. In this embodiment, Transferred StereoVisual Data TSVD is composed of Header TSVD1, Com Device ID TSVD2, HostID TSVD3, Transferred Stereo Visual Data TSVD4, and Footer TSVD5. ComDevice ID TSVD2 indicates the identification of Communication Device200, Host ID TSVD3 indicates the identification of Host H, andTransferred Stereo Visual Data TSVD4 is the stereo visual data extractedin the manner described hereinbefore. Header TSVD1 and Footer TSVD5indicate the beginning and the end of Transferred Stereo Visual DataTSVD.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in RAM 206 (FIG. 1)of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, RAM 206 includes StereoVisual Information Storage Area 20623a. Stereo Visual InformationStorage Area 20623a stores the software programs and data necessary toimplement the present function as described in details hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Stereo VisualInformation Storage Area 20623a. In this embodiment, Stereo VisualInformation Storage Area 20623a includes Stereo Visual Software StorageArea 20623b and Stereo Visual Data Storage Area 20623c. Stereo VisualSoftware Storage Area 20623b stores the software programs necessary toimplement the present function, such as the ones described hereinafter.Stereo Visual Data Storage Area 20623c stores the data necessary toimplement the present function, such as the ones described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the stereo visual data stored in StereoVisual Data Storage Area 20623c. A plurality of stereo visual data arestored in Stereo Visual Data Storage Area 20623c. In this embodiment,three stereo visual data, i.e., Stereo Visual Data 20623c1, StereoVisual Data 20623c2, and Stereo Visual Data 20623c3 are stored therein.

This paragraph illustrates the components of the stereo visual datastored in Stereo Visual Data Storage Area 20623c. This paragraphdescribes the components of Stereo Visual Data 20623c1 as an example. Inthis embodiment, Stereo Visual Data 20623c1 includes Left LCD VisualData 20623c1L, Right LCD Visual Data 20623c1R, and Stereo Visual DataOutput Timing Data 20623c1T. Left LCD Visual Data 20623c1L is a visualdata which is designed to be output from LCD 201L (not shown). Right LCDVisual Data 20623c1R is a visual data which is designed to be outputfrom LCD 201R (not shown). Stereo Visual Data Output Timing Data20623c1T is a timing data which is utilized to synchronize the output ofboth Left LCD Visual Data 20623c1L and Right LCD Visual Data 20623c1Rfrom LCD 201R and LCD 201L respectively.

The downloaded stereo visual data are stored in specific area(s) ofStereo Visual Data Storage Area 20623c.

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of selecting and preparing tooutput the stereo visual data from LCDs 201L and 201R (not shown) in astereo fashion. In this embodiment, a list of stereo visual data isdisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). The user of Communication Device 200selects one stereo visual data by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) orvia voice recognition system (S2). Assuming Stereo Visual Data 20623c1is selected in S2, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) retrieves Left LCD Visual Data20623c1L (S3), Right LCD Visual Data 20623c1R (S4), and Stereo VisualData Output Timing Data 20623c1T from Stereo Visual Data Storage Area20623c (S5).

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of outputting the stereo visualdata from LCDs 201L and 201R (not shown) in a stereo fashion. In thisembodiment, the user of Communication Device 200 inputs a specificsignal to output the stereo visual data by utilizing Input Device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). Assuming Visual Data20623c1 is selected in S2 explained hereinbefore, CPU 211 outputs LeftLCD Visual Data 20623c1L and Right LCD Visual Data 20623c1R from LCDs201L and 201R respectively in a stereo fashion in accordance with StereoVisual Data Output Timing Data 20623c1T (S2).

<<SOS Calling Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the SOS calling function whichenables Communication Device 200 to notify the police department thecurrent location of Communication Device 200 and the personalinformation of the user of Communication 200 when a 911 call is dialedfrom Communication Device 200.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in Host InformationStorage Area H00a. In this embodiment, Host Information Storage AreaH00a includes SOS Calling Information Storage Area H29a of which thedata stored therein are described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in SOS CallingInformation Storage Area H29a. In this embodiment, SOS CallingInformation Storage Area H29a includes SOS Calling Data Storage AreaH29b and SOS Calling Software Storage Area H29c. SOS Calling DataStorage Area H29b stores the data necessary to implement the presentfunction, such as the ones described hereinafter. SOS Calling SoftwareStorage Area H29c stores the software programs necessary to implementthe present function, such as the ones described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in SOS Calling DataStorage Area H29b. In this embodiment, SOS Calling Data Storage AreaH29b includes Police Department Location Data Storage Area H29b1 ofwhich the data stored therein are described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Police Department LocationData Storage Area H29b1. In this embodiment, Police Department LocationData Storage Area H29b1 includes three columns, i.e., Police Dept ID,Location Data, and Phone #. Police Dept ID represents the identificationof a police department (e.g., NYPD). Location Data represents thegeographical location data (in x, y, z format) of the police departmentof the corresponding Police Dept ID. Phone # represents the phone numberof the police department of the corresponding Police Dept ID. In thisembodiment, H29PD #1 is an identification of the police department ofwhich the geographical location is H29LD #1 and of which the phonenumber is H29PN #1; H29PD #2 is an identification of the policedepartment of which the geographical location is H29LD #2 and of whichthe phone number is H29PN #2; H29PD #3 is an identification of thepolice department of which the geographical location is H29LD #3 and ofwhich the phone number is H29PN #3; and H29PD #4 is an identification ofthe police department of which the geographical location is H29LD #4 andof which the phone number is H29PN #4.

The data and/or the software programs necessary to implement the presentfunction on the side of Communication Device 200 as describedhereinafter may be downloaded from Host H to Communication Device 200.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in RAM 206 (FIG. 1)of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, RAM 206 includes SOSCalling Information Storage Area 20629a of which the details aredescribed hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in SOS CallingInformation Storage Area 20629a. In this embodiment, SOS CallingInformation Storage Area 20629a includes SOS Calling Data Storage Area20629b and SOS Calling Software Storage Area 20629c. SOS Calling DataStorage Area 20629b includes data necessary to implement the presentfunction, such as the ones described hereinafter. SOS Calling SoftwareStorage Area 20629c stores the software programs necessary to implementthe present function, such as the one described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates storage areas included in SOS Calling DataStorage Area 20629b. In this embodiment, SOS Calling Data Storage Area20629b includes GPS Data Storage Area 20629b1 and User Data Storage Area20629b2. GPS Data Storage Area 20629b1 stores the data regarding thecurrent geographical location produced by the method so-called GPS asdescribed hereinbefore. User Data Storage Area 20629b2 stores the dataregarding the personal information of the user of Communication Device200 as described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in User Data Storage Area20629b2. In this embodiment, User Data Storage Area 20629b2 includesUser Data 20629UD which includes data regarding the personal informationof the user of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, User Data20629UD comprises Name, Age, Sex, Race, Blood Type, Home Address, andSSN. Name represents the name of the user of Communication Device 200;Age represents the age of the user of Communication Device 200; Sexrepresents the sex of the user of Communication Device 200; Racerepresents the race of the user of Communication Device 200; Blood Typerepresents the blood type of the user of Communication Device 200; HomeAddress represents the home address of the user of Communication Device200; and SSN represents the social security number of the user ofCommunication Device 200.

This paragraph illustrates the software program stored in SOS CallingSoftware Storage Area 20629c. In this embodiment, when the user ofCommunication Device 200 inputs 911 by utilizing Input Device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1), CPU 211 (FIG. 1)calculates the GPS data, i.e., the current geographical location data byutilizing the method so-called GPS as described hereinbefore (S2), andstores the GPS data in GPS Data Storage Area 20629b1 (S3). CPU 211 thenretrieves User Data 20629UD from User Data Storage Area 20629b2 and theGPS data from GPS Data Storage Area 20629b1 (S4), and composes SOS Data20629SOS therefrom (S5), which is sent thereafter to Host H (S6).

This paragraph illustrates the elements of SOS Data 20629SOS. In thisembodiment, SOS Data 20629SOS comprises Connection Request 20629CR, GPSData 20629GD, and User Data 20629UD. Connection Request 20629CRrepresents a request to Host H to forward the 911 call to a policedepartment. GPS Data 20629GD is a data retrieved from GPS Data StorageArea 20629b1 as described in S4 explained hereinbefore. User Data20629UD is a data retrieved from User Data Storage Area 20629b2 asdescribed in S4 explained hereinbefore.

This paragraph illustrates the software program stored in SOS CallingSoftware Storage Area H29c of Host H. In this embodiment, Host Hperiodically checks the incoming call (S1). If the incoming call is SOSData 20629SOS (S2), Host H initiates the SOS calling process asdescribed hereinafter (S3).

This paragraph illustrates the software program stored in SOS CallingSoftware Storage Area H29c of Host H. In this embodiment, Host Hretrieves GPS Data 20629GD from SOS Data 20629SOS (S1), and selects theclosest police department by comparing GPS Data 20629GD and the datastored in column Location Data of Police Department Location DataStorage Area H29b1 of Host H (S2). Host H then retrieves thecorresponding phone number stored in column Phone # and connects theline between the corresponding police department and CommunicationDevice 200 in order to initiate a voice communication therebetween (S3).Host H forwards to the police department thereafter GPS Data 20629GD andUser Data 20629UD retrieved in S1 (S4).

As another embodiment, User Data 20629UD stored in User Data StorageArea 20629b2 may be stored in SOS Calling Data Storage Area H29b of HostH. In this embodiment, SOS Data 20629SOS primarily comprises ConnectionRequest 20629CR and GPS Data 20629GD, and User Data 20629UD is retrievedfrom SOS Calling Data Storage Area H29b of Host H, which is sent to thepolice department in S4 explained hereinbefore.

<<Game Vibrating Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the game vibrating function whichvibrates Communication Device 200 when a predetermined condition is metwhile Communication Device 200 is executing a video game softwareprogram.

This paragraph illustrates another embodiment of the software programstored in Game Software Storage Area 2061d to implement the shootingvideo game function (not shown). When hit program is initiated (i.e.,when User Controlled Object UCO (not shown) is hit by CPU Fired BulletCFB (not shown)), CPU 211 (FIG. 1), first of all, activates Vibrator 217(FIG. 1) (S1). Then CPU 211 displays an explosion image on LCD 201(FIG. 1) by reading the three-dimensional data of CPU Fired Bullet CFBfrom 3D Object Data Storage Area 2061e and by ‘pasting’ the relevanttextures thereto stored in Texture Data Storage Area 2061f (S2). Next,CPU 211 erases the image of User Controlled Object UCO from LCD 201(S3), and also the explosion image (S4), and CPU 211 deactivatesVibrator 217 thereafter (S5).

This paragraph illustrates another embodiment of the software programstored in Game Software Storage Area 2061d to implement the driving gamefunction (not shown). In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) performs theuser controlled car process (S1), the CPU controlled car process for allCPU Controlled Car CCCs (not shown) displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2),the street image process (S3), and the background image process (S4).Further, CPU 211 performs the vibrator controlling process which isdescribed hereinafter (S5).

This paragraph illustrates the vibrator controlling process described inS5 explained hereinbefore. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1)periodically checks the position of User Controlled Car UCC (not shown)(S1). If User Controlled Car UCC is off the street or driving on astreet of a bad condition (S2), CPU 211 activates Vibrator 217 (FIG. 1)(S3). For purposes of implementing the present function to driving videogame, CPU 211 periodically checks the position of User Controlled CarUCC. CPU 211 also periodically checks the street condition by retrievingthe data regarding the street condition from Street Parameter StorageArea 2061g2 (not shown).

<<Digital Camera Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the digital camera function whichenables Communication Device 200 to take digital photos by utilizing CCDUnit 214 (FIG. 1).

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in RAM 206 (FIG.1). In this embodiment, RAM 206 includes Digital Camera InformationStorage Area 20646a of which the data and the software programs storedtherein are described hereinafter.

The data and software programs stored in Digital Camera InformationStorage Area 20646a may be downloaded from Host H.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Digital CameraInformation Storage Area 20646a. In this embodiment, Digital CameraInformation Storage Area 20646a includes Digital Camera Data StorageArea 20646b and Digital Camera Software Storage Area 20646c. DigitalCamera Data Storage Area 20646b stores the data necessary to implementthe present function, such as the ones described hereinafter. DigitalCamera Software Storage Area 20646c stores the software programsnecessary to implement the present function, such as the ones describedhereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Digital CameraData Storage Area 20646b. In this embodiment, Digital Camera DataStorage Area 20646b includes Photo Data Storage Area 20646b1 and DigitalCamera Function Data Storage Area 20646b2. Photo Data Storage Area20646b1 stores the data described hereinafter. Digital Camera FunctionData Storage Area 20646b2 stores the data stored hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Photo Data Storage Area20646b1. In this embodiment, Photo Data Storage Area 20646b1 comprisestwo columns, i.e., ‘Photo ID’ and ‘Photo Data’. Column ‘Photo ID’ storesthe identifications of the photo data, and column ‘Photo Data’ stores aplurality of photo data taken by implementing the present function. Inthis embodiment, Photo Data Storage Area 20646b1 stores the followingdata: ‘Photo ID’ Photo #1 of which the ‘Photo Data’ is 46PD1; ‘Photo ID’Photo #2 of which the ‘Photo Data’ is 46PD2; ‘Photo ID’ Photo #3 ofwhich the ‘Photo Data’ is 46PD3; ‘Photo ID’ Photo #4 of which the ‘PhotoData’ is 46PD4; and ‘Photo ID’ Photo #5 of which the ‘Photo Data’ is46PD5.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Digital CameraFunction Data Storage Area 20646b2. In this embodiment, Digital CameraFunction Data Storage Area 20646b2 includes Quality Data Storage Area20646b2a, Multiple Photo Shooting Number Data Storage Area 20646b2b, andStrobe Data Storage Area 20646b2c. Quality Data Storage Area 20646b2astores the data selected in S2 explained hereinafter. Multiple PhotoShooting Number Data Storage Area 20646b2b stores the data selected inS2 explained hereinafter. Strobe Data Storage Area 20646b2c stores thedata selected in S2 explained hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in DigitalCamera Software Storage Area 20646c. In this embodiment, Digital CameraSoftware Storage Area 20646c stores Quality Selecting Software 20646c1,Multiple Photo Shooting Software 20646c2, Trimming Software 20646c3,Digital Zooming Software 20646c4, Strobe Software 20646c5, DigitalCamera Function Selecting Software 20646c6, Multiple Photo ShootingNumber Selecting Software 20646c7, Strobe On/Off Selecting Software20646c8, Photo Data Shooting Software 20646c9, and Multiple PhotoShooting Software 20646c10. Quality Selecting Software 20646c1 is thesoftware program described hereinafter. Multiple Photo Shooting Software20646c2 is the software program described hereinafter. Trimming Software20646c3 is the software program described hereinafter. Digital ZoomingSoftware 20646c4 is the software program described hereinafter. StrobeSoftware 20646c5 is the software program described hereinafter. DigitalCamera Function Selecting Software 20646c6 is the software programdescribed hereinafter. Multiple Photo Shooting Number Selecting Software20646c7 is the software program described hereinafter. Strobe On/OffSelecting Software 20646c8 is the software program describedhereinafter. Photo Data Shooting Software 20646c9 is the softwareprogram described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates Digital Camera Function Selecting Software20646c6 stored in Digital Camera Software Storage Area 20646c whichadministers the overall flow of displaying the functions and selectingthe option for each function. In this embodiment, a list of functions isdisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). The items displayed on LCD 201 are‘Quality’, ‘Multiple Photo’, and ‘Strobe’. A function is selected byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S2), and the relevant software program is activated thereafter (S3). Inthe present embodiment, Quality Selecting Software 20646c1 describedhereinafter is activated when ‘Quality’ displayed on LCD 201 is selectedin S2. Multiple Photo Shooting Number Selecting Software 20646c7described hereinafter is activated when ‘Multiple Photo’ is selected inS2. Strobe On/Off Selecting Software 20646c8 described hereinafter isactivated when ‘Strobe’ is selected in S2.

This paragraph illustrates Quality Selecting Software 20646c1 stored inDigital Camera Software Storage Area 20646c which selects the quality ofthe photo data taken by implementing the present function. In thisembodiment, a list of options is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). Theoptions displayed on LCD 201 are ‘High’, ‘STD’, and ‘Low’ in the presentembodiment. One of the options is selected by utilizing Input Device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S2). The resolution of thephoto data taken is high if ‘High’ is selected; the resolution of thephoto taken is standard if ‘STD’ is selected; and the resolution of thephoto taken is low if ‘Low’ is selected. The selected option is storedas the quality data in Quality Data Storage Area 20646b2a (S3).

This paragraph illustrates Multiple Photo Shooting Number SelectingSoftware 20646c7 stored in Digital Camera Software Storage Area 20646cwhich selects the number of photos taken by a single photo shootingsignal. In this embodiment, a list of options is displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) (S1). The options displayed on LCD 201 are figures from ‘1’through ‘10’. Only one photo is taken by a photo shooting signal if ‘1’is selected; two photos are taken by a photo shooting signal if ‘2’ isselected; three photos are taken by a photo shooting signal if ‘3’ isselected; four photos are taken by a photo shooting signal if ‘4’ isselected; five photos are taken by a photo shooting signal if ‘5’ isselected; six photos are taken by a photo shooting signal if ‘6’ isselected; seven photos are taken by a photo shooting signal if ‘7’ isselected; eight photos are taken by a photo shooting signal if ‘8’ isselected; nine photos are taken by a photo shooting signal if ‘9’ isselected; and ten photos are taken by a photo shooting signal if ‘10’ isselected. A digit from ‘1’ through ‘10’ is selected by utilizing InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S2). The selecteddigital is stored as the multiple photo shooting number data in MultiplePhoto Shooting Number Data Storage Area 20646b2b (S3).

This paragraph illustrates Strobe On/Off Selecting Software 20646c8stored in Digital Camera Software Storage Area 20646c which selectsFlash Light Unit 220 (not shown) to be activated or not when a photo istaken. In this embodiment, a list of options is displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) (S1). The options displayed on LCD 201 are ‘On’ and ‘Off’.Flash Light Unit 220 is activated at the time photo is taken if ‘On’ isselected; and Flash Light Unit 220 is not activated at the time photo istaken if ‘Off’ is selected. One of the two options is selected byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S2). The selected option is stored as the strobe data in Strobe DataStorage Area 20646b2c (S3).

This paragraph illustrates Photo Data Shooting Software 20646c9 storedin Digital Camera Software Storage Area 20646c which takes photo(s) inaccordance with the options selected hereinbefore. In this embodiment, aphoto shooting signal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) orvia voice recognition system (S1). Here, the photo shooting signalindicates CPU 211 (FIG. 1) to input photo data to CCD Unit 214 (FIG. 1)and store the data in Photo Data Storage Area 20646b1. CPU 211 thenretrieves the quality data from Quality Data Storage Area 20646b2a (S2).The photo data is input via CCD Unit 214 (S3), and the data is stored inPhoto Data Storage Area 20646b1 with new photo ID in accordance with thequality data retrieved in S2 (S4).

This paragraph illustrates Multiple Photo Shooting Software 20646c2stored in Digital Camera Software Storage Area 20646c which takesphoto(s) in accordance with the options selected hereinbefore. In thisembodiment, a photo shooting signal is input by utilizing Input Device210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1)retrieves the multiple photo shooting number data from Multiple PhotoShooting Number Data Storage Area 20646b2b (S2). CPU 211 then takesphotos in accordance with the multiple photo shooting number dataretrieved in S2 (S3). Namely, only one photo is taken by a photoshooting signal if the multiple photo shooting number data retrieved inS2 is ‘1’; two photos are taken by a photo shooting signal if themultiple photo shooting number data retrieved in S2 is ‘2’; three photosare taken by a photo shooting signal if the multiple photo shootingnumber data retrieved in S2 is ‘3’; four photos are taken by a photoshooting signal if the multiple photo shooting number data retrieved inS2 is ‘4’; five photos are taken by a photo shooting signal if themultiple photo shooting number data retrieved in S2 is ‘5’; six photosare taken by a photo shooting signal if the multiple photo shootingnumber data retrieved in S2 is ‘6’; seven photos are taken by a photoshooting signal if the multiple photo shooting number data retrieved inS2 is ‘7’; eight photos are taken by a photo shooting signal if themultiple photo shooting number data retrieved in S2 is ‘8’; nine photosare taken by a photo shooting signal if the multiple photo shootingnumber data retrieved in S2 is ‘9’; and ten photos are taken by a photoshooting signal if the multiple photo shooting number data retrieved inS2 is ‘10’.

This paragraph illustrates Strobe Software 20646c5 stored in DigitalCamera Software Storage Area 20646c which takes photo(s) in accordancewith the options selected hereinbefore. In this embodiment, a photoshooting signal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or viavoice recognition system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) retrieves the strobedata from Strobe Data Storage Area 20646b2c (S2). If the strobe data is‘On’ (S3), CPU 211 activates Flash Light Unit 220 (not shown) each timea photo is taken (S4). In other words, Strobe Software 20646c5 isharmonized with Multiple Photo Shooting Software 20646c2 describedhereinbefore. Namely, Flash Light Unit 220 is activated for one time ifone photo is taken by a single photo shooting signal. Flash Light Unit220 is activated for two times if two photos are taken by a single photoshooting signal. Flash Light Unit 220 is activated for three times ifthree photos are taken by a single photo shooting signal. Flash LightUnit 220 is activated for four times if four photos are taken by asingle photo shooting signal. Flash Light Unit 220 is activated for fivetimes if five photos are taken by a single photo shooting signal. FlashLight Unit 220 is activated for six times if six photos are taken by asingle photo shooting signal. Flash Light Unit 220 is activated forseven times if seven photos are taken by a single photo shooting signal.Flash Light Unit 220 is activated for eight times if eight photos aretaken by a single photo shooting signal. Flash Light Unit 220 isactivated for nine times if nine photos are taken by a single photoshooting signal. Flash Light Unit 220 is activated for ten times if tenphotos are taken by a single photo shooting signal.

This paragraph illustrates one embodiment of the zooming function whichzooms the photo data stored in Photo Data Storage Area 20646b1. In thisembodiment, a certain photo selected by the user of Communication Device200 is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). Assuming that the user intends tozoom Object 20646Obj, the object displayed on LCD 201, to a larger size.The user selects Area 46ARa which includes Object 20646Obj by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system, and theselected area is zoomed to fit the size of LCD 201. The zoomed photo isreplaced with the original photo.

This paragraph illustrates the operation performed in RAM 206 (FIG. 1)to implement the zooming function described hereinbefore. A certainphoto data selected by the user of Communication Device 200 is stored inArea 20646ARa of RAM 206. Here, the size of the photo data is as same asthat of Area 20646ARa. In this embodiment, Display Area 20646DA is thearea which is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). Area 46ARa is the areawhich is selected by the user of Communication Device 200. Object20646Obj is the object included in the photo data. Area 46ARa whichincludes Object 20646Obj is selected by utilizing Input Device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system, and the photo data stored inArea 20646ARa is zoomed to the size in which the size of Area 46ARaequals to that of Display Area 20646DA. The zoomed photo data isreplaced with the original photo data and stored in Photo Data StorageArea 20646b1. The portion of the photo data which does not fit Area20646ARa is cropped.

This paragraph illustrates Digital Zooming Software 20646c4 stored inDigital Camera Software Storage Area 20646c which implements theoperation described hereinbefore. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1)displays a list of the photo IDs representing the photo data stored inPhoto Data Storage Area 20646b1 as well as the thumbnails (S1). Acertain photo data is selected by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) orvia voice recognition system (S2), and the selected photo data isdisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) as described hereinbefore (S3). Area 46ARadescribed hereinbefore is selected by utilizing Input Device 210 or viavoice recognition system (S4). When a zooming signal is input byutilizing Input Device 210 or via voice recognition system (S5), CPU 211(FIG. 1) implements the process described hereinbefore and replaces theoriginal photo data with the zoomed photo data, which is stored in PhotoData Storage Area 20646b1 (S6).

This paragraph illustrates one embodiment of the trimming function whichtrims the photo data stored in Photo Data Storage Area 20646b1 andthereby moves the selected object to the center of the photo data. Inthis embodiment, a certain photo selected by the user of CommunicationDevice 200 is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). Point 20646PTa adjacent toObject 20646Obj is selected by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) orvia voice recognition system, and the photo is centered at Point20646PTa. The trimmed photo is replaced with the original photo.

This paragraph illustrates the operation performed in RAM 206 (FIG. 1)to implement the trimming function described hereinbefore. In thisembodiment, Display Area 20646DA is the portion of the photo data whichis displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). Object 20646Obj is the object includedin the photo data. Point 20646PTa is the point selected by the user ofCommunication Device 200 adjacent to Object 20646Obj which is centeredby the present function. In this embodiment, a certain photo dataselected by the user of Communication Device 200 is stored in Area20646ARb of RAM 206. Here, the size of the photo data is as same as thatof Area 20646ARb. Point 20646PTa is selected by utilizing Input Device210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system, and the photo data iscentered at Point 20646PTa by sliding the entire photo data to theright. The trimmed photo data is replaced with the original photo dataand stored in Photo Data Storage Area 20646b1. The portion of the photodata which does not fit Area 20646ARa is cropped.

This paragraph illustrates Trimming Software 20646c3 stored in DigitalCamera Software Storage Area 20646c which implements the operationdescribed hereinbefore. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) displays alist of the photo IDs representing the photo data stored in Photo DataStorage Area 20646b1 as well as the thumbnails (S1). A certain photodata is selected by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system (S2), and the selected photo data is displayed on LCD201 (FIG. 1) as described hereinbefore (S3). Point 20646PTa describedhereinbefore is selected by utilizing Input Device 210 or via voicerecognition system (S4). When a trimming signal is input by utilizingInput Device 210 or via voice recognition system (S5), CPU 211 (FIG. 1)centers the photo data at Point 20646PTa (not shown) and replaces theoriginal photo data with the trimmed photo data, which is stored inPhoto Data Storage Area 20646b1 (S6).

<<Multiple Window Displaying Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the multiple window displayingfunction which displays a plurality of windows on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200.

This paragraph illustrates the concept of the present function. In thisembodiment, the display area of LCD 201 (FIG. 1) is primarily composedof two display areas, i.e., Windows Display Area 20148WDA and Task Bar20148TB. Windows Display Area 20148WDA is the display area where aplurality of windows are displayed. Task Bar 20148TB is the display arealocated on the lower part of LCD 201 (FIG. 1) where the iconscorresponding to the windows displayed in Windows Display Area 20148WDAare displayed. In this embodiment, two windows area displayed in WindowsDisplay Area 20148WDA, i.e., Window A and Window B. In this embodiment,Window A is displayed on top of Window B which means that Window A haspriority over Window B. Two icons, i.e., Icon A which corresponds toWindow A and Icon B are which corresponds to Window B are displayed inTask Bar 20148TB.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in RAM 206 (FIG.1). In this embodiment, RAM 206 includes Multiple Window DisplayingInformation Storage Area 20648a of which the data and the softwareprograms stored therein are described hereinafter.

The data and/or the software programs stored in Multiple WindowDisplaying Information Storage Area 20648a may be downloaded from HostH.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Multiple WindowDisplaying Information Storage Area 20648a. In this embodiment, MultipleWindow Displaying Information Storage Area 20648a includes MultipleWindow Displaying Data Storage Area 20648b and Multiple WindowDisplaying Software Storage Area 20648c. Multiple Window Displaying DataStorage Area 20648b stores the data necessary to implement the presentfunction, such as the ones described hereinafter. Multiple WindowDisplaying Software Storage Area 20648c stores the software programsnecessary to implement the present function, such as the ones describedhereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in Multiple WindowDisplaying Data Storage Area 20648b. In this embodiment, Multiple WindowDisplaying Data Storage Area 20648b includes Window Data Storage Area20648b1 which is further explained hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the method to identify the location and thesize of each window display in Windows Display Area 20148WDA. In thisembodiment, Base Point 20148BP is the point of the upper-left corner ofWindows Display Area 20148WDA. Reference Point 20148RP is the point ofthe upper-left corner of each window displayed in Windows Display Area20148WDA. The location of Reference Point 20148RP in Windows DisplayArea 20148WDA is identified based on the distance from Base Point20148BP in ‘x cm, y cm’ format. The size of each window is identified bythe width and the height in centimeters.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Window Data Storage Area20648b1. In this embodiment, Window Data Storage Area 20648b1 comprisessix columns, i.e., ‘Window ID’, ‘Reference Point Data’, ‘Width Data’,‘Height Data’, ‘Priority Data’, and ‘Icon ID’. Column ‘Window ID’ storesthe identifications of the window data. Column ‘Reference Point Data’stores Reference Point 20148RP of each window displayed in WindowsDisplay Area 20148WDA. Column ‘Width Data’ stores the width of eachwindow in centimeters. Column ‘Height Data’ stores the height of eachwindow in centimeters. Column ‘Priority Data’ stores the priority ofeach window displayed in Windows Display Area 20148WDA. Column ‘Icon ID’stores the identifications of the icons displayed in Task Bar 20148TB.In this embodiment, the following data area stored in Window DataStorage Area 20648b1: the ‘Window ID″Window #1’ of which the ‘ReferencePoint Data’, the ‘Width Data’, the ‘Height Data’, the ‘Priority Data’,and the ‘Icon ID’ are ‘2 cm, 3 cm’, ‘5 cm’, ‘2 cm’, ‘Priority #4’, and‘Icon #1’; the ‘Window ID’ ‘Window #2’ of which the ‘Reference PointData’, the ‘Width Data’, the ‘Height Data’, the ‘Priority Data’, and the‘Icon ID’ are ‘1 cm, 2 cm’, ‘4 cm’, ‘4 cm’, ‘Priority #3’, and ‘Icon #2;the ‘Window ID’ ‘Window #3’ of which the ‘Reference Point Data’, the‘Width Data’, the ‘Height Data’, the ‘Priority Data’, and the ‘Icon ID’are ‘1 cm, 2 cm’, ‘5 cm’, ‘6 cm’, ‘Priority #2’, and ‘Icon #3’; and the‘Window ID’ ‘Window #4’ of which the ‘Reference Point Data’, the ‘WidthData’, the ‘Height Data’, the ‘Priority Data’, and the ‘Icon ID’ are ‘2cm, 3 cm’, ‘4 cm’, ‘5 cm’, ‘Priority #1’, and ‘Icon #4’.

Referring to the ‘Priority Data’, ‘Window #4’ has the highest priorityover the rest of the windows in being displayed in Windows Display Area20148WDA(i.e., ‘Priority #1’), ‘Window #3’ has the priority over ‘Window#2’ and ‘Window #1’ in being displayed in Windows Display Area20148WDA(i.e., ‘Priority #2’), ‘Window #2’ has the priority over ‘Window#1’ in being displayed in Windows Display Area 20148WDA(i.e., ‘Priority#3’), and ‘Window #1’ has the lowest priority over the rest of thewindows in being displayed in Windows Display Area 20148WDA(i.e.,‘Priority #4’).

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in MultipleWindow Displaying Software Storage Area 20648c. In this embodiment,Multiple Window Displaying Software Storage Area 20648c stores WindowGenerating Software 20648c1, Window Closing Software 20648c2, WindowSize Changing Software 20648c3, Window Size Minimizing Software 20648c4,and Window Size Restoring Software 20648c5. Window Generating Software20648c1 is the software program described hereinafter. Window ClosingSoftware 20648c2 is the software program described hereinafter. WindowSize Changing Software 20648c3 is the software program describedhereinafter. Window Size Minimizing Software 20648c4 is the softwareprogram described hereinafter. Window Size Restoring Software 20648c5 isthe software program described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates Window Opening Software 20648c1 stored inMultiple Window Displaying Software Storage Area 20648c which opens anew window in Windows Display Area 20148WDA when a new software program(e.g., MS Word, MS Excel, MS Access, calculator, back-up softwareprogram, Windows Explorer, Outlook Express, image viewer, and InternetExplorer) is executed. In this embodiment, when a software program isexecuted (S1), CPU 211 (FIG. 1) generates a new window data (S2). Thesize (i.e., the width and the height thereof) may be of the defaultsettings. CPU 211 adds a new Window ID in Window Data Storage Area20648b1 for the new window data (S3). CPU 211 further sets the highest‘Priority Data’ (i.e., ‘Priority #1’) for the new window (S4), andstores the new window data generated in S2 as well as the ‘PriorityData’ set in S4 in Window Data Storage Area 20648b1 (S5). CPU 211updates the ‘Priority Data’ of the other windows accordingly, i.e., the‘Priority Data’ of the other windows are shifted to the one rank lowerone and stores the updated ‘Priority Data’ in Window Data Storage Area20648b1 (S6). CPU 211 displays the new window in Windows Display Area20148WDA (S7) and the new icon on Task Bar 20148TB (S8).

This paragraph illustrates Window Closing Software 20648c2 stored inMultiple Window Displaying Software Storage Area 20648c which closes thewindow displayed in Windows Display Area 20148WDA when the correspondingsoftware program is terminated. In this embodiment, when a softwareprogram is terminated (S1), CPU 211 (FIG. 1) deletes the correspondingwindow data from Window Data Storage Area 20648b1 (S2). CPU 211 thencloses the corresponding window displayed on Windows Display Area20148WDA (S3) and erases the corresponding icon from Task Bar 20148TB(S4). CPU 211 updates the ‘Priority Data’ of the other windowsaccordingly, i.e., the ‘Priority Data’ of the other windows are shiftedto the one rank higher one and stores the updated ‘Priority Data’ inWindow Data Storage Area 20648b1 (S5).

This paragraph illustrates Window Size Changing Software 20648c3 storedin Multiple Window Displaying Software Storage Area 20648c which changesthe size of the window displayed in Windows Display Area 20148WDA. Inthis embodiment, a certain window is selected by utilizing Input Device210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). A window sizechanging signal which indicates to change the size of the windowdisplayed in Windows Display Area 20148WDA is input in the same manner(S2). CPU 211 (FIG. 1), by identifying the information contained in thewindow size changing signal, updates and stores the renewed window data(with new ‘Reference Point Data’, ‘Width Data’, and ‘Height Data’) inWindow Data Storage Area 20648b1 (S3). The window with the renewed sizeis displayed in Windows Display Area 20148WDA thereafter (S4).

This paragraph illustrates Window Size Minimizing Software 20648c4stored in Multiple Window Displaying Software Storage Area 20648c whichminimizes the size of the window to zero displayed in Windows DisplayArea 20148WDA. In this embodiment, a certain window is selected byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S1). A window size minimizing signal which indicates to minimize thesize of the window displayed in Windows Display Area 20148WDA is inputin the same manner (S2). The window data of the corresponding windowremains unchanged except the ‘Priority Data’. The ‘Priority Data’ of theminimized window is shifted to the lowest one (S3). CPU 211 (FIG. 1)updates the ‘Priority Data’ of the other windows accordingly, i.e., the‘Priority Data’ of the other windows are shifted to the one rank higherone and stores the updated ‘Priority Data’ in Window Data Storage Area20648b1 (S4). The size of the window displayed in Windows Display Area20148WDA is minimized thereafter (S5).

This paragraph illustrates Window Size Restoring Software 20648c5 storedin Multiple Window Displaying Software Storage Area 20648c whichrestores the size of the window minimized by Window Size MinimizingSoftware 20648c4 to its original size. In this embodiment, a certainwindow is selected by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system (S1). A window size restoring signal which indicatesto restore the size of the window displayed in Windows Display Area20148WDA is input in the same manner (S2). CPU 211 (FIG. 1), byidentifying the information contained in the window size restoringsignal, retrieves the window data (i.e., ‘Reference Point Data’, ‘WidthData’, and ‘Height Data’) from Window Data Storage Area 20648b1 (S3).CPU 211 sets the highest ‘Priority Data’ (i.e., ‘Priority #1’) for therestored window (S4), and stores the data in Window Data Storage Area20648b1 (S4). CPU 211 further updates the ‘Priority Data’ of the otherwindows accordingly, i.e., the ‘Priority Data’ of the other windows areshifted to the one rank lower one and stores the updated ‘Priority Data’in Window Data Storage Area 20648b1 (S5). The window size is restoredthereafter (S6).

<<Mouse Pointer Displaying Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the mouse pointer displayingfunction which displays on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200a mouse pointer which is manipulated by the user of Communication Device200. The mouse pointer is primarily utilized to select, open, close,drag & drop files, and its image is similar to the one displayed onordinary personal computers.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in RAM 206 (FIG.1). In this embodiment, RAM 206 includes Mouse Pointer DisplayingInformation Storage Area 20649a of which the data and the softwareprograms stored therein are described hereinafter.

The data and/or the software programs stored in Mouse Pointer DisplayingInformation Storage Area 20649a may be downloaded from Host H.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Mouse PointerDisplaying Information Storage Area 20649a. In this embodiment, MousePointer Displaying Information Storage Area 20649a includes MousePointer Displaying Data Storage Area 20649b and Mouse Pointer DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20649c. Mouse Pointer Displaying Data Storage Area20649b stores the data necessary to implement the present function, suchas the ones described hereinafter. Mouse Pointer Displaying SoftwareStorage Area 20649c stores the software programs necessary to implementthe present function, such as the ones described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Mouse PointerDisplaying Data Storage Area 20649b. In this embodiment, Mouse PointerDisplaying Data Storage Area 20649b includes Mouse Pointer Image DataStorage Area 20649b1 and Current Pointer Data Storage Area 20649b2.Mouse Pointer Image Data Storage Area 20649b1 stores the data describedhereinafter. Current Pointer Data Storage Area 20649b2 stores the datadescribed hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Mouse Pointer Image DataStorage Area 20649b1. In this embodiment, Mouse Pointer Image DataStorage Area 20649b1 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Pointer ID’ and‘Pointer Image Data’. Column ‘Pointer ID’ stores the pointer IDs, i.e.,the identifications of the pointer image data stored in column ‘PointerImage Data’, and column ‘Pointer Image Data’ stores the pointer imagedata designed to be displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). The pointer imagedata stored in column ‘Pointer Image Data’ in the present example arethe following: Pointer Image Data #1 which is a small white arrow,Pointer Image Data #2 which is a large white arrow, Pointer Image Data#3 which is a small black arrow, and Pointer Image Data #4 which is alarge black arrow. Pointer #1 is the identification of Pointer ImageData #1, Pointer #2 is the identification of Pointer Image Data #2,Pointer #3 is the identification of Pointer Image Data #3, and Pointer#4 is the identification of Pointer Image Data #4.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Current Pointer DataStorage Area 20649b2. In this embodiment, Current Pointer Data StorageArea 20649b2 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Selected Pointer ID’ and‘Current Location Data’. ‘Selected Pointer ID’ stores the pointer IDs ofthe pointer image data selected in S3 explained hereinafter. Column‘Current Location Data’ stores the current location data whichrepresents the location of the mouse pointer displayed on LCD 201 (FIG.1). The current location data is stored in (x cm, y cm) format wherein‘x cm’ represents the distance from the base point located on the upperleft corner (not shown) of LCD 201 on x axis in centimeters, and ‘y cm’represents the distance from the base point on y axis in centimeters. Inthis embodiment, the pointer ID ‘Pointer #1’ is stored in column‘Selected Pointer ID’ and the current location data (2 cm, 3 cm) isstored in column ‘Current Location Data’. In this embodiment, PointerImage Data #1 (i.e., a small white arrow) of which the pointer ID is‘Pointer #1’ is displayed on LCD 201 at the location of 2 cm from thebase point on x axis and 3 cm from the base point on y axis.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in Mouse PointerDisplaying Software Storage Area 20649c. In this embodiment, MousePointer Displaying Software Storage Area 20649c stores Mouse PointerImage Data Selecting Software 20649c1, Mouse Pointer Moving Software20649c2, Mouse Pointer Displaying Software 20649c3, VRS Pointer MovingSignal Producing Software 20649c4, Keypad Pointer Moving SignalProducing Software 20649c5, Joystick Pointer Moving Signal ProducingSoftware 20649c6, and ETS Pointer Moving Signal Producing Software20649c7. Mouse Pointer Image Data Selecting Software 20649c1 is thesoftware program described hereinafter. Mouse Pointer Moving Software20649c2 is the software program described hereinafter. Mouse PointerDisplaying Software 20649c3 is the software program describedhereinafter. VRS Pointer Moving Signal Producing Software 20649c4 is thesoftware program described hereinafter. Keypad Pointer Moving SignalProducing Software 20649c5 is the software program describedhereinafter. Joystick Pointer Moving Signal Producing Software 20649c6is the software program described hereinafter. ETS Pointer Moving SignalProducing Software 20649c7 is the software program describedhereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates Mouse Pointer Image Data Selecting Software20649c1 stored in Mouse Pointer Displaying Software Storage Area 20649cwhich selects the mouse pointer image data from a list displayed on LCD201 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) retrieves all pointerimage data from Mouse Pointer Image Data Storage Area 20649b1 (S1) anddisplays a list thereof on LCD 201 (S2). A mouse pointer image data isselected from the list by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or viavoice recognition system (S3), and CPU 211 stores the correspondingpointer ID in column ‘Selected Pointer ID’ of Current Pointer DataStorage Area 20649b2 (S4).

This paragraph illustrates Mouse Pointer Moving Software 20649c2 storedin Mouse Pointer Displaying Software Storage Area 20649c which updatesthe current location data stored in Current Pointer Data Storage Area20649b2 when mouse pointer moving signal is input. In this embodiment, amouse pointer moving signal indicating to move the mouse pointerdisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) to a new location is input by the methoddescribed hereinafter (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then calculates the newlocation where the mouse pointer is to be displayed (S2), and stores thenew current location data in ‘Current Location Data’ of Current PointerData Storage Area 20649b2 (S3).

This paragraph illustrates Mouse Pointer Displaying Software 20649c3stored in Mouse Pointer Displaying Software Storage Area 20649c whichdisplays the mouse pointer on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) retrieves the pointer ID from column ‘Selected Pointer ID’of Current Pointer Data Storage Area 20649b2 (S1). CPU 211 thenretrieves the corresponding pointer image data from Mouse Pointer ImageData Storage Area 20649b1 (S2). CPU 211 further retrieves the currentlocation data from column ‘Current Location Data’ of Current PointerData Storage Area 20649b2 (S3). Based on the data retrieved in S1through S3, CPU 211 displays the pointer image data on LCD 201 inaccordance with the current location data (S4).

The software programs described hereinbefore are repeated periodically,preferably sixty times every second.

This paragraph illustrates VRS Pointer Moving Signal Producing Software20649c4 stored in Mouse Pointer Displaying Software Storage Area 20649cwhich produces the mouse pointer moving signal described in S1 explainedhereinbefore indicating to move up the mouse pointer by utilizing thevoice recognition system described hereinbefore. In this embodiment, avoice command ‘move up’ is input via Microphone 215 (FIG. 1) (S1). Inresponse to the voice command, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) produces the mousepointer moving signal indicating to move up the mouse pointer (S2).

This paragraph illustrates VRS Pointer Moving Signal Producing Software20649c4 stored in Mouse Pointer Displaying Software Storage Area 20649cwhich produces the mouse pointer moving signal described in S1 explainedhereinbefore indicating to move down the mouse pointer by utilizing thevoice recognition system described hereinbefore. In this embodiment, avoice command ‘move down’ is input via Microphone 215 (FIG. 1) (S1). Inresponse to the voice command, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) produces the mousepointer moving signal indicating to move down the mouse pointer (S2).

This paragraph illustrates VRS Pointer Moving Signal Producing Software20649c4 stored in Mouse Pointer Displaying Software Storage Area 20649cwhich produces the mouse pointer moving signal described in S1 explainedhereinbefore indicating to move left the mouse pointer by utilizing thevoice recognition system described hereinbefore. In this embodiment, avoice command ‘move left’ is input via Microphone 215 (FIG. 1) (S1). Inresponse to the voice command, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) produces the mousepointer moving signal indicating to move left the mouse pointer (S2).

This paragraph illustrates VRS Pointer Moving Signal Producing Software20649c4 stored in Mouse Pointer Displaying Software Storage Area 20649cwhich produces the mouse pointer moving signal described in S1 explainedhereinbefore indicating to move right the mouse pointer by utilizing thevoice recognition system described hereinbefore. In this embodiment, avoice command ‘move right’ is input via Microphone 215 (FIG. 1) (S1). Inresponse to the voice command, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) produces the mousepointer moving signal indicating to move right the mouse pointer (S2).

This paragraph illustrates Keypad Pointer Moving Signal ProducingSoftware 20649c5 stored in Mouse Pointer Displaying Software StorageArea 20649c which produces the mouse pointer moving signal described inS1 explained hereinbefore indicating to move up the mouse pointer byutilizing the keypad, i.e., Numeric Data Input Device 21000a (notshown). In this embodiment, numeric data ‘8’ is input via keypad, i.e.,Numeric Data Input Device 21000a (not shown) (S1). In response to theinput numeric data, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) produces the mouse pointer movingsignal indicating to move up the mouse pointer (S2).

This paragraph illustrates Keypad Pointer Moving Signal ProducingSoftware 20649c5 stored in Mouse Pointer Displaying Software StorageArea 20649c which produces the mouse pointer moving signal described inS1 explained hereinbefore indicating to move down the mouse pointer byutilizing the keypad, i.e., Numeric Data Input Device 21000a (notshown). In this embodiment, numeric data ‘2’ is input via keypad, i.e.,Numeric Data Input Device 21000a (not shown) (S1). In response to theinput numeric data, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) produces the mouse pointer movingsignal indicating to move down the mouse pointer (S2).

This paragraph illustrates Keypad Pointer Moving Signal ProducingSoftware 20649c5 stored in Mouse Pointer Displaying Software StorageArea 20649c which produces the mouse pointer moving signal described inS1 explained hereinbefore indicating to move left the mouse pointer byutilizing the keypad, i.e., Numeric Data Input Device 21000a (notshown). In this embodiment, numeric data ‘4’ is input via keypad, i.e.,Numeric Data Input Device 21000a (not shown) (S1). In response to theinput numeric data, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) produces the mouse pointer movingsignal indicating to move left the mouse pointer (S2).

This paragraph illustrates Keypad Pointer Moving Signal ProducingSoftware 20649c5 stored in Mouse Pointer Displaying Software StorageArea 20649c which produces the mouse pointer moving signal described inS1 explained hereinbefore indicating to move right the mouse pointer byutilizing the keypad, i.e., Numeric Data Input Device 21000a (notshown). In this embodiment, numeric data ‘6’ is input via keypad, i.e.,Numeric Data Input Device 21000a (not shown) (S1). In response to theinput numeric data, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) produces the mouse pointer movingsignal indicating to move right the mouse pointer (S2).

This paragraph illustrates Joystick Pointer Moving Signal ProducingSoftware 20649c6 stored in Mouse Pointer Displaying Software StorageArea 20649c which produces the mouse pointer moving signal described inS1 explained hereinbefore indicating to move up the mouse pointer byutilizing Joystick 21000d (not shown). In this embodiment, Joystick21000d is shifted up (S1). In response thereto, CPU 211 (FIG. 1)produces the mouse pointer moving signal indicating to move up the mousepointer (S2).

This paragraph illustrates Joystick Pointer Moving Signal ProducingSoftware 20649c6 stored in Mouse Pointer Displaying Software StorageArea 20649c which produces the mouse pointer moving signal described inS1 explained hereinbefore indicating to move down the mouse pointer byutilizing Joystick 21000d (not shown). In this embodiment, Joystick21000d is shifted down (S1). In response thereto, CPU 211 (FIG. 1)produces the mouse pointer moving signal indicating to move down themouse pointer (S2).

This paragraph illustrates Joystick Pointer Moving Signal ProducingSoftware 20649c6 stored in Mouse Pointer Displaying Software StorageArea 20649c which produces the mouse pointer moving signal described inS1 explained hereinbefore indicating to move left the mouse pointer byutilizing Joystick 21000d (not shown). In this embodiment, Joystick21000d is shifted left (S1). In response thereto, CPU 211 (FIG. 1)produces the mouse pointer moving signal indicating to move left themouse pointer (S2).

This paragraph illustrates Joystick Pointer Moving Signal ProducingSoftware 20649c6 stored in Mouse Pointer Displaying Software StorageArea 20649c which produces the mouse pointer moving signal described inS1 explained hereinbefore indicating to move right the mouse pointer byutilizing Joystick 21000d (not shown). In this embodiment, Joystick21000d is shifted right (S1). In response thereto, CPU 211 (FIG. 1)produces the mouse pointer moving signal indicating to move right themouse pointer (S2).

This paragraph illustrates ETS Pointer Moving Signal Producing Software20649c7 stored in Mouse Pointer Displaying Software Storage Area 20649cwhich produces the mouse pointer moving signal described in S1 explainedhereinbefore indicating to move up the mouse pointer by utilizing theeye tracking system. Here, the eye tracking system is a system to movethe mouse pointer displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) by utilizing the eye ofthe user of Communication Device 200. By utilizing this system, CPU 211(FIG. 1) periodically monitors the movement of the eyes of the user ofCommunication Device 200, and the mouse pointer automatically moves tothe location at which he/she is currently gazing. The mechanism of theeye tracking system is introduced in the following inventions and thereferences cited thereof: U.S. Pat. No. 6,459,446; U.S. Pat. No.6,394,602; U.S. Pat. No. 6,381,339; U.S. Pat. No. 6,373,961; U.S. Pat.No. 6,359,601; U.S. Pat. No. 5,926,251; U.S. Pat. No. 5,861,940; U.S.Pat. No. 5,859,686; U.S. Pat. No. 5,638,176; U.S. Pat. No. 5,635,947;U.S. Pat. No. 5,583,335; U.S. Pat. No. 5,491,492; U.S. Pat. No.5,481,622; U.S. Pat. No. 5,430,505; U.S. Pat. No. 5,410,376; U.S. Pat.No. 5,345,281; U.S. Pat. No. 5,331,149; U.S. Pat. No. 5,270,748; U.S.Pat. No. 5,231,674; and U.S. Pat. No. 4,376,309. The eye tracking systemmay be implemented by utilizing CCD Unit 214 (FIG. 1) or an eye trackingunit may be installed in Communication Device 200 to implement thesystem. For the avoidance of doubt, the eye tracking system may beimplemented by either a hardware unit or a software program.

In this embodiment, the user of Communication Device 200 rolls uphis/her eyes, which is detected by the eye tracking system (S1). CPU 211(FIG. 1), in response thereto, produces the mouse pointer moving signalindicating to move up the mouse pointer (S2).

This paragraph illustrates ETS Pointer Moving Signal Producing Software20649c7 stored in Mouse Pointer Displaying Software Storage Area 20649cwhich produces the mouse pointer moving signal described in S1 explainedhereinbefore indicating to move down the mouse pointer by utilizing theeye tracking system. In this embodiment, the user of CommunicationDevice 200 rolls down his/her eyes, which is detected by the eyetracking system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1), in response thereto, producesthe mouse pointer moving signal indicating to move down the mousepointer (S2).

This paragraph illustrates ETS Pointer Moving Signal Producing Software20649c7 stored in Mouse Pointer Displaying Software Storage Area 20649cwhich produces the mouse pointer moving signal described in S1 explainedhereinbefore indicating to move left the mouse pointer by utilizing theeye tracking system. In this embodiment, the user of CommunicationDevice 200 rolls left his/her eyes, which is detected by the eyetracking system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1), in response thereto, producesthe mouse pointer moving signal indicating to move left the mousepointer (S2).

This paragraph illustrates ETS Pointer Moving Signal Producing Software20649c7 stored in Mouse Pointer Displaying Software Storage Area 20649cwhich produces the mouse pointer moving signal described in S1 explainedhereinbefore indicating to move right the mouse pointer by utilizing theeye tracking system. In this embodiment, the user of CommunicationDevice 200 rolls right his/her eyes, which is detected by the eyetracking system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1), in response thereto, producesthe mouse pointer moving signal indicating to move right the mousepointer (S2).

This paragraph illustrates a different embodiment of Mouse PointerMoving Software 20649c2 stored in Mouse Pointer Displaying SoftwareStorage Area 20649c which is executed in combination of eye trackingsystem explained hereinbefore. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1), byutilizing the eye tracking system, determines the location on LCD 201(FIG. 1) at which the user of Communication Device 200 is currentlygazing (S1). CPU 211 then determines the new location where the mousepointer is to be displayed (S2), and stores the new and updated currentlocation data in ‘Current Location Data’ of Current Pointer Data StorageArea 20649b2 (S3).

<<Multiple Language Displaying Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the multiple language displayingfunction wherein a language is selected from a plurality of languages,such as English, Japanese, French, and German, which is utilized tooperate Communication Device 200.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in RAM 206 (FIG.1). In this embodiment, RAM 206 includes Multiple Language DisplayingInfo Storage Area 20654a of which the data and the software programsstored therein are described hereinafter.

The data and/or the software programs stored in Multiple LanguageDisplaying Info Storage Area 20654a may be downloaded from Host H.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in MultipleLanguage Displaying Info Storage Area 20654a. In this embodiment,Multiple Language Displaying Info Storage Area 20654a includes MultipleLanguage Displaying Data Storage Area 20654b and Multiple LanguageDisplaying Software Storage Area 20654c. Multiple Language DisplayingData Storage Area 20654b stores the data necessary to implement thepresent function, such as the ones described hereinafter. MultipleLanguage Displaying Software Storage Area 20654c stores the softwareprograms necessary to implement the present function, such as the onesdescribed hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in MultipleLanguage Displaying Data Storage Area 20654b. In this embodiment,Multiple Language Displaying Data Storage Area 20654b includes LanguageTables Storage Area 20654b1, Language Type Data Storage Area 20654b2,Language Item Data Storage Area 20654b3, and Selected Language Table IDStorage Area 20654b4. Language Tables Storage Area 20654b1 stores thedata described hereinafter. Language Type Data Storage Area 20654b2stores the data described hereinafter. Language Item Data Storage Area20654b3 stores the data described hereinafter. Selected Language TableID Storage Area 20654b4 stores the language table ID selected in S4sexplained hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Language TablesStorage Area 20654b1. In this embodiment, Language Tables Storage Area20654b1 includes Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1a, LanguageTable#2 Storage Area 20654b1b, Language Table#3 Storage Area 20654b1c,and Language Table#4 Storage Area 20654b1d. Language Table#1 StorageArea 20654b1a stores the data described hereinafter. Language Table#2Storage Area 20654b1b stores the data described hereinafter. LanguageTable#3 Storage Area 20654b1c stores the data described hereinafter.Language Table#4 Storage Area 20654b1d stores the data describedhereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Language Table#1 StorageArea 20654b1a. In this embodiment, Language Table#1 Storage Area20654b1a comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Language Item ID’ and ‘LanguageText Data’. Column ‘Language Item ID’ stores the language item IDs, andeach language item ID represents the identification of the correspondinglanguage text data.

Column ‘Language Text Data’ stores the language text data, and eachlanguage text data represents the English text data displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1). In this embodiment, Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1astores the following data: the language item ID ‘Language Item#1’ andthe corresponding language text data ‘Open file’; the language item ID‘Language Item#2’ and the corresponding language text data ‘Close file’;the language item ID ‘Language Item#3’ and the corresponding languagetext data ‘Delete’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#4’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘Copy’; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#5’ and the corresponding language text data ‘Cut’; the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#6’ and the corresponding language text data‘Paste’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#7’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘Insert’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#8’ andthe corresponding language text data ‘File’; the language item ID‘Language Item#9’ and the corresponding language text data ‘Edit’; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#10’ and the corresponding language textdata ‘View; the language item ID ‘Language Item#11’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘Format; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#12’ and the corresponding language text data ‘Tools; the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#13’ and the corresponding language text data‘Window; the language item ID ‘Language Item#14’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘Help; the language item ID ‘Language Item#15’ andthe corresponding language text data ‘My Network; the language item ID‘Language Item#16’ and the corresponding language text data ‘Trash; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#17’ and the corresponding language textdata ‘Local Disk’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#18’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘Save; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#19’ and the corresponding language text data ‘Yes; the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#20’ and the corresponding language text data No;and the language item ID ‘Language Item#21’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘Cancel’.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Language Table#1 StorageArea 20654b1b. In this embodiment, Language Table#1 Storage Area20654b1b comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Language Item ID’ and ‘LanguageText Data’. Column ‘Language Item ID’ stores the language item IDs, andeach language item ID represents the identification of the correspondinglanguage text data. Column ‘Language Text Data’ stores the language textdata, and each language text data represents the Japanese text datadisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, Language Table#1Storage Area 20654b1b stores the following data: the language item ID‘Language Item#1’ and the corresponding language text data meaning ‘Openfile’ in Japanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item#2’ and thecorresponding language text data meaning ‘Close file’ in Japanese; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#3’ and the corresponding language textdata meaning ‘Delete’ in Japanese; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#4’ and the corresponding language text data meaning ‘Copy’ inJapanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item#5’ and the correspondinglanguage text data meaning ‘Cut’ in Japanese; the language item ID‘Language Item#6’ and the corresponding language text data meaning‘Paste’ in Japanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item#7’ and thecorresponding language text data meaning ‘Insert’ in Japanese; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#8’ and the corresponding language textdata meaning ‘File’ in Japanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item#9’and the corresponding language text data meaning ‘Edit’ in Japanese; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#10’ and the corresponding language textdata meaning ‘View’ in Japanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item#11’and the corresponding language text data meaning ‘Format’ in Japanese;the language item ID ‘Language Item#12’ and the corresponding languagetext data meaning ‘Tools’ in Japanese; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#13’ and the corresponding language text data meaning ‘Window’ inJapanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item#14’ and the correspondinglanguage text data meaning ‘Help’ in Japanese; the language item ID‘Language Item#15’ and the corresponding language text data meaning ‘MyNetwork’ in Japanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item#16’ and thecorresponding language text data meaning ‘Trash’ in Japanese; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#17’ and the corresponding language textdata meaning ‘Local Disk’ in Japanese; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#18’ and the corresponding language text data meaning ‘Save’ inJapanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item#19’ and the correspondinglanguage text data meaning ‘Yes’ in Japanese; the language item ID‘Language Item#20’ and the corresponding language text data meaning ‘No’in Japanese; and the language item ID ‘Language Item#21’ and thecorresponding language text data meaning ‘Cancel’ in Japanese.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Language Table#1 StorageArea 20654b1c. In this embodiment, Language Table#1 Storage Area20654b1c comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Language Item ID’ and ‘LanguageText Data’. Column ‘Language Item ID’ stores the language item IDs, andeach language item ID represents the identification of the correspondinglanguage text data. Column ‘Language Text Data’ stores the language textdata, and each language text data represents the French text datadisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, Language Table#1Storage Area 20654b1c stores the following data: the language item ID‘Language Item#1’ and the corresponding language text data ‘French#1’meaning ‘Open file’ in French; the language item ID ‘Language Item#2’and the corresponding language text data ‘French#2’ meaning ‘Close file’in French; the language item ID ‘Language Item#3’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘French#3’ meaning ‘Delete’ in French; the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#4’ and the corresponding language text data‘French#4’ meaning ‘Copy’ in French; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#5’ and the corresponding language text data ‘French#5’ meaning‘Cut’ in French; the language item ID ‘Language Item#6’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘French#6’ meaning ‘Paste’ in French;the language item ID ‘Language Item#7’ and the corresponding languagetext data ‘French#7’ meaning ‘Insert’ in French; the language item ID‘Language Item#8’ and the corresponding language text data ‘French#8’meaning ‘File’ in French; the language item ID ‘Language Item#9’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘French#9’ meaning ‘Edit’ in French;the language item ID ‘Language Item#10’ and the corresponding languagetext data ‘French#10’ meaning ‘View’ in French; the language item ID‘Language Item#11’ and the corresponding language text data ‘French#11’meaning ‘Format’ in French; the language item ID ‘Language Item#12’ andthe corresponding language text data ‘French#12’ meaning ‘Tools’ inFrench; the language item ID ‘Language Item#13’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘French#13’ meaning ‘Window’ in French; the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#14’ and the corresponding language text data‘French#14’ meaning ‘Help’ in French; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#15’ and the corresponding language text data ‘French#15’ meaning‘My Network’ in French; the language item ID ‘Language Item#16’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘French#16’ meaning ‘Trash’ in French;the language item ID ‘Language Item#17’ and the corresponding languagetext data ‘French#17’ meaning ‘Local Disk’ in French; the language itemID ‘Language Item#18’ and the corresponding language text data‘French#18’ meaning ‘Save’ in French; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#19’ and the corresponding language text data ‘French#19’ meaning‘Yes’ in French; the language item ID ‘Language Item#20’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘French#20’ meaning ‘No’ in French; andthe language item ID ‘Language Item#21’ and the corresponding languagetext data ‘French#21’ meaning ‘Cancel’ in French.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Language Table#1 StorageArea 20654b1d. In this embodiment, Language Table#1 Storage Area20654b1d comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Language Item ID’ and ‘LanguageText Data’. Column ‘Language Item ID’ stores the language item IDs, andeach language item ID represents the identification of the correspondinglanguage text data. Column ‘Language Text Data’ stores the language textdata, and each language text data represents the German text datadisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, Language Table#1Storage Area 20654b1d stores the following data: the language item ID‘Language Item#1’ and the corresponding language text data ‘German#1’meaning ‘Open file’ in German; the language item ID ‘Language Item#2’and the corresponding language text data ‘German#2’ meaning ‘Close file’in German; the language item ID ‘Language Item#3’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘German#3’ meaning ‘Delete’ in German; the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#4’ and the corresponding language text data‘German#4’ meaning ‘Copy’ in German; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#5’ and the corresponding language text data ‘German#5’ meaning‘Cut’ in German; the language item ID ‘Language Item#6’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘German#6’ meaning ‘Paste’ in German;the language item ID ‘Language Item#7’ and the corresponding languagetext data ‘German#7’ meaning ‘Insert’ in German; the language item ID‘Language Item#8’ and the corresponding language text data ‘German#8’meaning ‘File’ in German; the language item ID ‘Language Item#9’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘German#9’ meaning ‘Edit’ in German;the language item ID ‘Language Item#10’ and the corresponding languagetext data ‘German#10’ meaning ‘View’ in German; the language item ID‘Language Item#11’ and the corresponding language text data ‘German#11’meaning ‘Format’ in German; the language item ID ‘Language Item#12’ andthe corresponding language text data ‘German#12’ meaning ‘Tools’ inGerman; the language item ID ‘Language Item#13’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘German#13’ meaning ‘Window’ in German; the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#14’ and the corresponding language text data‘German#14’ meaning ‘Help’ in German; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#15’ and the corresponding language text data ‘German#15’ meaning‘My Network’ in German; the language item ID ‘Language Item#16’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘German#16’ meaning ‘Trash’ in German;the language item ID ‘Language Item#17’ and the corresponding languagetext data ‘German#17’ meaning ‘Local Disk’ in German; the language itemID ‘Language Item#18’ and the corresponding language text data‘German#18’ meaning ‘Save’ in German; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#19’ and the corresponding language text data ‘German#19’ meaning‘Yes’ in German; the language item ID ‘Language Item#20’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘German#20’ meaning ‘No’ in German; andthe language item ID ‘Language Item#21’ and the corresponding languagetext data ‘German#21’ meaning ‘Cancel’ in German.

This paragraph illustrates data stored in Language Type Data StorageArea 20654b2. In this embodiment, Language Type Data Storage Area20654b2 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Language Table ID’ and ‘LanguageType Data’. Column ‘Language Table ID’ stores the language table ID, andeach language table ID represents the identification of the storageareas included in Language Tables Storage Area 20654b1. Column ‘LanguageType Data’ stores the language type data, and each language type datarepresents the type of the language utilized in the language table ofthe corresponding language table ID. In this embodiment, Language TypeData Storage Area 20654b2 stores the following data: the language tableID ‘Language Table#1’ and the corresponding language type data‘English’; the language table ID ‘Language Table#2’ and thecorresponding language type data ‘Japanese’; the language table ID‘Language Table#3’ and the corresponding language type data ‘French’;and the language table ID ‘Language Table#4’ and the correspondinglanguage type data ‘German’. Here, the language table ID ‘LanguageTable#1’ is an identification of Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1a;the language table ID ‘Language Table#2’ is an identification ofLanguage Table#2 Storage Area 20654b1b; the language table ID ‘LanguageTable#3’ is an identification of Language Table#3 Storage Area 20654b1c;and the language table ID ‘Language Table#4’ is an identification ofLanguage Table#4 Storage Area 20654b1d.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Language Item Data StorageArea 20654b3. In this embodiment, Language Item Data Storage Area20654b3 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Language Item ID’ and ‘LanguageItem Data’. Column ‘Language Item ID’ stores the language item IDs, andeach language item ID represents the identification of the correspondinglanguage item data. Column ‘Language Item Data’ stores the language itemdata, and each language item data represents the content and/or themeaning of the language text data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). In thisembodiment, Language Item Data Storage Area 20654b3 stores the followingdata: the language item ID ‘Language Item#1’ and the correspondinglanguage item data ‘Open file’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#2’and the corresponding language item data ‘Close file’; the language itemID ‘Language Item#3’ and the corresponding language item data ‘Delete’;the language item ID ‘Language Item#4’ and the corresponding languageitem data ‘Copy’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#5’ and thecorresponding language item data ‘Cut’; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#6’ and the corresponding language item data ‘Paste’; the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#7’ and the corresponding language item data‘Insert’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#8’ and the correspondinglanguage item data ‘File’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#9’ andthe corresponding language item data ‘Edit’; the language item ID‘Language Item#10’ and the corresponding language item data View; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#11’ and the corresponding language itemdata ‘Format’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#12’ and thecorresponding language item data ‘Tools’; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#13’ and the corresponding language item data ‘Window’; the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#14’ and the corresponding language item data‘Help’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#15’ and the correspondinglanguage item data ‘My Network’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#16’and the corresponding language item data ‘Trash’; the language item ID‘Language Item#17’ and the corresponding language item data ‘LocalDisk’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#18’ and the correspondinglanguage item data ‘Save’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#19’ andthe corresponding language item data ‘Yes’; the language item ID‘Language Item#20’ and the corresponding language item data ‘No’; andthe language item ID ‘Language Item#21’ and the corresponding languageitem data ‘Cancel’. Primarily, the data stored in column ‘Language ItemData’ are same as the ones stored in column ‘Language Text Data’ ofLanguage Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1a.

This paragraph illustrates the software program stored in MultipleLanguage Displaying Software Storage Area 20654c. In this embodiment,Multiple Language Displaying Software Storage Area 20654c storesLanguage Selecting Software 20654c1, Selected Language DisplayingSoftware 20654c2, Language Text Data Displaying Software For WordProcessor 20654c3a, Language Text Data Displaying Software For WordProcessor 20654c3b, and Language Text Data Displaying Software ForExplorer 20654c4. Language Selecting Software 20654c1 is the softwareprogram described hereinafter. Selected Language Displaying Software20654c2 is the software program described hereinafter. Language TextData Displaying Software For Word Processor 20654c3a is the softwareprogram described hereinafter. Language Text Data Displaying SoftwareFor Word Processor 20654c3b is the software program describedhereinafter. Language Text Data Displaying Software For Explorer 20654c4is the software program described hereinafter.

<<Multiple Language Displaying Function—Utilizing English>>

This paragraph illustrates Language Selecting Software 20654c1 stored inMultiple Language Displaying Software Storage Area 20654c which selectsthe language utilized to operate Communication Device 200 from aplurality of languages. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 retrieves the language type data from LanguageType Data Storage Area 20654b2 (S1), and Displays a list of availablelanguages on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). In the present example, thefollowing languages are displayed on LCD 201: English, Japanese, French,and German. A certain language is selected therefrom by utilizing InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S3). Assume that‘English’ is selected in S3. CPU 211 then identifies the language tableID corresponding to the language type data in Language Type Data StorageArea 20654b2, and stores the language table ID (Language Table#1) inSelected Language Table ID Storage Area 20654b4 (S4).

This paragraph illustrates Selected Language Displaying Software 20654c2stored in Multiple Language Displaying Software Storage Area 20654cwhich displays and operates with the language selected in S3 explainedhereinbefore (i.e., English). In this embodiment, when CommunicationDevice 200 is powered on (S1), CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device200 retrieves the selected language table ID (Language Table#1) fromSelected Language Table ID Storage Area 20654b4 (S2). CPU 211 thenidentifies the storage area corresponding to the language table IDselected in S2 (Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1a) in LanguageTables Storage Area 20654b1 (S3). Language text data displaying processis initiated thereafter of which the details are described hereinafter(S4).

This paragraph illustrates Language Text Data Displaying Software ForWord Processor 20654c3a stored in Multiple Language Displaying SoftwareStorage Area 20654c which displays the language text data at the time aword processor, such as MS Word and WordPerfect is executed. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 executes a wordprocessor in response to the signal input by the user of CommunicationDevice 200 indicating to activate and execute the word processor (S1).In the process of displaying the word processor on LCD 201 (FIG. 1), thefollowing steps of S2 through S8 are implemented. Namely, CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#8’ in Language Table#1Storage Area 20654b1a and displays the corresponding language text data‘File’ at the predetermined location in the word processor (S2). CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#9’ in Language Table#1Storage Area 20654b1a and displays the corresponding language text data‘Edit’ at the predetermined location in the word processor (S3). CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#10’ in Language Table#1Storage Area 20654b1a and displays the corresponding language text data‘View’ at the predetermined location in the word processor (S4). CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#11’ in Language Table#1Storage Area 20654b1a and displays the corresponding language text data‘Format’ at the predetermined location in the word processor (S5). CPU211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#12’ in LanguageTable#1 Storage Area 20654b1a and displays the corresponding languagetext data ‘Tools’ at the predetermined location in the word processor(S6). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#13’ inLanguage Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1a and displays the correspondinglanguage text data ‘Window’ at the predetermined location in the wordprocessor (S7). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#14’ in Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1a and displays thecorresponding language text data ‘Help’ at the predetermined location inthe word processor (S8). Alphanumeric data is input to the wordprocessor by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system thereafter (S9).

This paragraph illustrates the data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 at the time Language Text Data DisplayingSoftware For Word Processor 20654c3a is implemented. In this embodiment,the word processor described hereinbefore is primarily composed of MenuBar 20154MB and Alphanumeric Data Input Area 20154ADIA wherein thelanguage text data described in S2 through S8 explained hereinbefore aredisplayed on Menu Bar 20154MB and alphanumeric data are input inAlphanumeric Data Input Area 20154ADIA. In this embodiment, 20154MBF isthe language text data processed in S2 of the previous paragraph;20154MBE is the language text data processed in S3 of the previousparagraph; 20154MBV is the language text data processed in S4 of theprevious paragraph; 20154MBF is the language text data processed in S5of the previous paragraph; 20154MBT is the language text data processedin S6 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBW is the language text dataprocessed in S7 of the previous paragraph; and 20154MBH is the languagetext data processed in S8 of the previous paragraph.

This paragraph illustrates Language Text Data Displaying Software ForWord Processor 20654c3b stored in Multiple Language Displaying SoftwareStorage Area 20654c which displays a prompt on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at thetime a word processor is closed. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 initiates the closing process of the wordprocessor in response to the signal input by the user of CommunicationDevice 200 indicating to close the word processor (S1). In the processof closing the word processor, the following steps of S2 through S5 areimplemented. Namely, CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#18’ in Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1a and displays thecorresponding language text data ‘Save’ at the predetermined location inthe word processor (S2). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID‘Language Item#19’ in Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1a anddisplays the corresponding language text data ‘Yes’ at the predeterminedlocation in the word processor (S3). CPU 211 identifies the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#20’ in Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1a anddisplays the corresponding language text data ‘No’ at the predeterminedlocation in the word processor (S4). CPU 211 identifies the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#21’ in Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1a anddisplays the corresponding language text data ‘Cancel’ at thepredetermined location in the word processor (S5). The save signalindicating to save the alphanumeric data input in S9 explainedhereinbefore is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or viavoice recognition system, assuming that the user of Communication Device200 intends to save the data (S6), and the data are saved in apredetermined location in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) (S7). The word processor isclosed thereafter (S8).

This paragraph illustrates the data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 at the time Language Text Data DisplayingSoftware For Word Processor 20654c3b is implemented. In this embodiment,Prompt 20154Pr is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at the time LanguageText Data Displaying Software For Word Processor 20654c3a is closed. Inthis embodiment, Prompt 20154Pr is primarily composed of 20154PrS,20154PrY, 20154PrN, and 20154PrC. In this embodiment, 20154PrS is thelanguage text data processed in S2 of the previous paragraph; 20154PrYis the language text data processed in S3 of the previous paragraph;20154PrN is the language text data processed in S4 of the previousparagraph; and 20154PrC is the language text data processed in S5 of theprevious paragraph.

This paragraph illustrates Language Text Data Displaying Software ForExplorer 20654c4 stored in Multiple Language Displaying Software StorageArea 20654c which displays the language text data at the time a WindowsExplorer like software program which displays folders and/or directoriesand the structures thereof is executed. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 executes Windows Explorer likesoftware program in response to the signal input by the user ofCommunication Device 200 indicating to activate and execute the softwareprogram (S1). In the process of displaying the Windows Explorer likesoftware program on LCD 201 (FIG. 1), the steps of S2 through S4 areimplemented. Namely, CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#15’ in Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1a and displays thecorresponding language text data ‘My Network’ at the predeterminedlocation in the Windows Explorer like software program (S2). CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#16’ in Language Table#1Storage Area 20654b1a and displays the corresponding language text data‘Trash’ at the predetermined location in the Windows Explorer likesoftware program(S3). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#17’ in Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1a and displays thecorresponding language text data ‘Local Disk’ at the predeterminedlocation in the Windows Explorer like software program(S4).

This paragraph illustrates the data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 at the time Language Text Data DisplayingSoftware For Explorer 20654c4 is executed. In this embodiment, 20154LD,20154MN, and 20154Tr are displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at the timeLanguage Text Data Displaying Software For Explorer 20654c4 is executed.In this embodiment, 20154LD is the language text data processed in S4 ofthe previous paragraph; 20154MN is the language text data processed inS2 of the previous paragraph; and 20154Tr is the language text dataprocessed in S3 of the previous paragraph.

<<Multiple Language Displaying Function—Utilizing Japanese>>

This paragraph illustrates Language Selecting Software 20654c1 stored inMultiple Language Displaying Software Storage Area 20654c which selectsthe language utilized to operate Communication Device 200 from aplurality of languages. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 retrieves the language type data from LanguageType Data Storage Area 20654b2 (S1), and Displays a list of availablelanguages on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). In the present example, thefollowing languages are displayed on LCD 201: English, Japanese, French,and German. A certain language is selected therefrom by utilizing InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S3). Assume that‘Japanese’ is selected in S3. CPU 211 then identifies the language tableID corresponding to the language type data in Language Type Data StorageArea 20654b2, and stores the language table ID (Language Table#2) inSelected Language Table ID Storage Area 20654b4 (S4).

This paragraph illustrates Selected Language Displaying Software 20654c2stored in Multiple Language Displaying Software Storage Area 20654cwhich displays and operates with the language selected in S3 explainedhereinbefore (i.e., Japanese). In this embodiment, when CommunicationDevice 200 is powered on (S1), CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device200 retrieves the selected language table ID (Language Table#2) fromSelected Language Table ID Storage Area 20654b4 (S2). CPU 211 thenidentifies the storage area corresponding to the language table IDselected in S2 (Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654b1b) in LanguageTables Storage Area 20654b1 (S3). Language text data displaying processis initiated thereafter of which the details are described hereinafter(S4).

This paragraph illustrates Language Text Data Displaying Software ForWord Processor 20654c3a stored in Multiple Language Displaying SoftwareStorage Area 20654c which displays the language text data at the time aword processor, such as MS Word and WordPerfect is executed. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 executes a wordprocessor in response to the signal input by the user of CommunicationDevice 200 indicating to activate and execute the word processor (S1).In the process of displaying the word processor on LCD 201 (FIG. 1), thefollowing steps of S2 through S8 are implemented. Namely, CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#8’ in Language Table#2Storage Area 20654b1b and displays the corresponding language text dataindicating ‘File’ in Japanese at the predetermined location in the wordprocessor (S2). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#9’ in Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654b1b and displays thecorresponding language text data indicating ‘Edit’ in Japanese at thepredetermined location in the word processor (S3). CPU 211 identifiesthe language item ID ‘Language Item#10’ in Language Table#2 Storage Area20654b1b and displays the corresponding language text data indicating‘View’ in Japanese at the predetermined location in the word processor(S4). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#11’ inLanguage Table#2 Storage Area 20654b1b and displays the correspondinglanguage text data indicating ‘Format’ in Japanese at the predeterminedlocation in the word processor (S5). CPU 211 identifies the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#12’ in Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654b1b anddisplays the corresponding language text data indicating ‘Tools’ inJapanese at the predetermined location in the word processor (S6). CPU211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#13’ in LanguageTable#2 Storage Area 20654b1b and displays the corresponding languagetext data indicating ‘Window’ in Japanese at the predetermined locationin the word processor (S7). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID‘Language Item#14’ in Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654b1b anddisplays the corresponding language text data indicating ‘Help’ inJapanese at the predetermined location in the word processor (S8).Alphanumeric data is input to the word processor by utilizing InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system thereafter (S9).

This paragraph illustrates the data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 at the time Language Text Data DisplayingSoftware For Word Processor 20654c3a is implemented. In this embodiment,the word processor described hereinbefore is primarily composed of MenuBar 20154MB and Alphanumeric Data Input Area 20154ADIA wherein thelanguage text data described in S2 through S8 explained hereinbefore aredisplayed on Menu Bar 20154MB and alphanumeric data are input inAlphanumeric Data Input Area 20154ADIA. In this embodiment, 20154MBF isthe language text data processed in S2 of the previous paragraph;20154MBE is the language text data processed in S3 of the previousparagraph; 20154MBV is the language text data processed in S4 of theprevious paragraph; 20154MBF is the language text data processed in S5of the previous paragraph; 20154MBT is the language text data processedin S6 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBW is the language text dataprocessed in S7 of the previous paragraph; and 20154MBH is the languagetext data processed in S8 of the previous paragraph.

This paragraph illustrates Language Text Data Displaying Software ForWord Processor 20654c3b stored in Multiple Language Displaying SoftwareStorage Area 20654c which displays a prompt on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at thetime a word processor is closed. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 initiates the closing process of the wordprocessor in response to the signal input by the user of CommunicationDevice 200 indicating to close the word processor (S1). In the processof closing the word processor, the following steps of S2 through S5 areimplemented. Namely, CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#18’ in Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654b1b and displays thecorresponding language text data indicating ‘Save’ in Japanese at thepredetermined location in the word processor (S2). CPU 211 identifiesthe language item ID ‘Language Item#19’ in Language Table#2 Storage Area20654b1b and displays the corresponding language text data indicating‘Yes’ in Japanese at the predetermined location in the word processor(S3). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#20’ inLanguage Table#2 Storage Area 20654b1b and displays the correspondinglanguage text data indicating No' in Japanese at the predeterminedlocation in the word processor (S4). CPU 211 identifies the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#21’ in Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654b1b anddisplays the corresponding language text data indicating ‘Cancel’ inJapanese at the predetermined location in the word processor (S5). Thesave signal indicating to save the alphanumeric data input in S9explained hereinbefore is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1)or via voice recognition system, assuming that the user of CommunicationDevice 200 intends to save the data (S6), and the data are saved in apredetermined location in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) (S7). The word processor isclosed thereafter (S8).

This paragraph illustrates the data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 at the time Language Text Data DisplayingSoftware For Word Processor 20654c3b is implemented. In this embodiment,Prompt 20154Pr is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at the time LanguageText Data Displaying Software For Word Processor 20654c3a is closed. Inthis embodiment, Prompt 20154Pr is primarily composed of 20154PrS,20154PrY, 20154PrN, and 20154PrC. In this embodiment, 20154PrS is thelanguage text data processed in S2 of the previous paragraph; 20154PrYis the language text data processed in S3 of the previous paragraph;20154PrN is the language text data processed in S4 of the previousparagraph; and 20154PrC is the language text data processed in S5 of theprevious paragraph.

This paragraph illustrates Language Text Data Displaying Software ForExplorer 20654c4 stored in Multiple Language Displaying Software StorageArea 20654c which displays the language text data at the time a WindowsExplorer like software program which displays folders and/or directoriesand the structures thereof is executed. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 executes Windows Explorer likesoftware program in response to the signal input by the user ofCommunication Device 200 indicating to activate and execute the softwareprogram (S1). In the process of displaying the Windows Explorer likesoftware program on LCD 201 (FIG. 1), the following steps of S2 throughS4 are implemented. Namely, CPU 211 identifies the language item ID‘Language Item#15’ in Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654b1b anddisplays the corresponding language text data indicating ‘My Network’ inJapanese at the predetermined location in the Windows Explorer likesoftware program (S2). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#16’ in Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654b1b and displays thecorresponding language text data indicating ‘Trash’ in Japanese at thepredetermined location in the Windows Explorer like softwareprogram(S3). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#17’in Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654b1b and displays the correspondinglanguage text data indicating ‘Local Disk’ in Japanese at thepredetermined location in the Windows Explorer like softwareprogram(S4).

This paragraph illustrates the data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 at the time Language Text Data DisplayingSoftware For Explorer 20654c4 is executed. In this embodiment, 20154LD,20154MN, and 20154Tr are displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at the timeLanguage Text Data Displaying Software For Explorer 20654c4 is executed.In this embodiment, 20154LD is the language text data processed in S4 ofthe previous paragraph; 20154MN is the language text data processed inS2 of the previous paragraph; and 20154Tr is the language text dataprocessed in S3 of the previous paragraph.

<<Caller's Information Displaying Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the Caller's Information displayingfunction which displays the Information regarding the caller (e.g.,name, phone number, email address, and home address, etc.) on LCD 201(FIG. 1) when Communication Device 200 is utilized as a ‘TV phone’.

Firstly, the following paragraphs illustrate the data and softwareprograms stored in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device, a CommunicationDevice 200, utilized by the caller.

Secondly, the following paragraphs illustrate the data and softwareprograms stored in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device, a CommunicationDevice 200, utilized by the callee.

Thirdly, the following paragraphs illustrate the data and softwareprograms stored in Host H.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in RAM 206 (FIG. 1)of Caller's Device. In this embodiment, RAM 206 of Caller's Deviceincludes Caller's Information Displaying Information Storage Area 20655aof which the data and the software programs stored therein are describedhereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Caller'sInformation Displaying Information Storage Area 20655a. In thisembodiment, Caller's Information Displaying Information Storage Area20655a includes Caller's Information Displaying Data Storage Area 20655band Caller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655c.Caller's Information Displaying Data Storage Area 20655b stores the datanecessary to implement the present function on the side of Caller'sDevice, such as the ones described hereinafter. Caller's InformationDisplaying Software Storage Area 20655c stores the software programsnecessary to implement the present function on the side of Caller'sDevice, such as the ones described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Caller'sInformation Displaying Data Storage Area 20655b. In this embodiment,Caller's Information Displaying Data Storage Area 20655b includesCaller's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655b1, Callee's AudiovisualData Storage Area 20655b2, Caller's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b3,Callee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b4, Caller's Calculated GPSData Storage Area 20655b5, Callee's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area20655b6, Caller's Map Data Storage Area 20655b7, Callee's Map DataStorage Area 20655b8, and Work Area 20655b9. Caller's Audiovisual DataStorage Area 20655b1 stores the data described hereinafter. Callee'sAudiovisual Data Storage Area 20655b2 stores the data describedhereinafter. Caller's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b3 stores the datadescribed hereinafter. Callee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b4stores the data described hereinafter. Caller's Calculated GPS DataStorage Area 20655b5 stores the caller's calculated GPS data whichrepresents the current geographic location of Caller's Device in (x, y,z) format. Callee's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655b6 stores thecallee's calculated GPS data which represents the current geographiclocation of Callee's Device in (x, y, z) format. Caller's Map DataStorage Area 20655b7 stores the map data representing the surroundingarea of the location indicated by the caller's calculated GPS data.Callee's Map Data Storage Area 20655b8 stores the map data representingthe surrounding area of the location indicated by the callee'scalculated GPS data. Work Area 20655b9 is a storage area utilized toperform calculation and to temporarily store data.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Caller'sAudiovisual Data Storage Area 20655b1. In this embodiment, Caller'sAudiovisual Data Storage Area 20655b1 includes Caller's Audio DataStorage Area 20655b1a and Caller's Visual Data Storage Area 20655b1b.Caller's Audio Data Storage Area 20655b1a stores the caller's audio datawhich represents the audio data input via Microphone 215 (FIG. 1) ofCaller's Device. Caller's Visual Data Storage Area 20655b1b stores thecaller's visual data which represents the visual data input via CCD Unit214 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Callee'sAudiovisual Data Storage Area 20655b2. In this embodiment, Callee'sAudiovisual Data Storage Area 20655b2 includes Callee's Audio DataStorage Area 20655b2a and Callee's Visual Data Storage Area 20655b2b.Callee's Audio Data Storage Area 20655b2a stores the callee's audio datawhich represents the audio data sent from Callee's Device. Callee'sVisual Data Storage Area 20655b2b stores the callee's visual data whichrepresents the visual data sent from Callee's Device.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Caller's Personal DataStorage Area 20655b3. In this embodiment, Caller's Personal Data StorageArea 20655b3 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Caller's Personal Data’ and‘Permitted Caller's Personal Data Flag’. Column ‘Caller's Personal Data’stores the caller's personal data which represent the personal data ofthe caller. Column ‘Permitted Caller's Personal Data Flag’ stores thepermitted caller's personal data flag and each permitted caller'spersonal data flag represents whether the corresponding caller'spersonal data is permitted to be displayed on Callee's Device. Thepermitted caller's personal data flag is represented by either ‘1’ or‘0’ wherein ‘1’ indicates that the corresponding caller's personal datais permitted to be displayed on Callee's Device, and ‘0’ indicates thatthe corresponding caller's personal data is not permitted to bedisplayed on Callee's Device. In this embodiment, Caller's Personal DataStorage Area 20655b3 stores the following data: the caller's name andthe corresponding permitted caller's personal data flag ‘1’; thecaller's phone number and the corresponding permitted caller's personaldata flag ‘1’; the caller's email address and the correspondingpermitted caller's personal data flag ‘1’; the caller's home address andthe corresponding permitted caller's personal data flag ‘1’; thecaller's business address and the corresponding permitted caller'spersonal data flag ‘0’; the caller's title and the correspondingpermitted caller's personal data flag ‘0’; the caller's hobby and thecorresponding permitted caller's personal data flag ‘0’; the caller'sblood type and the corresponding permitted caller's personal data flag‘0’; the caller's gender and the corresponding permitted caller'spersonal data flag ‘0’; the caller's age and the corresponding permittedcaller's personal data flag ‘0’; and caller's date of birth and thecorresponding permitted caller's personal data flag ‘0’.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Callee's Personal DataStorage Area 20655b4. In this embodiment, Callee's Personal Data StorageArea 20655b4 stores the callee's personal data which represent thepersonal data of the callee which are displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) ofCaller's Device. In this embodiment, Callee's Personal Data Storage Area20655b4 stores the callee's name and phone number.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in Caller'sInformation Displaying Software Storage Area 20655c. In this embodiment,Caller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655c storesPermitted Caller's Personal Data Selecting Software 20655c1, DialingSoftware 20655c2, Caller's Device Pin-pointing Software 20655c3, MapData Sending/Receiving Software 20655c4, Caller's Audiovisual DataCollecting Software 20655c5, Caller's Information Sending/ReceivingSoftware 20655c6, Callee's Information Sending/Receiving Software20655c6a, Permitted Callee's Personal Data Displaying Software 20655c7,Map Displaying Software 20655c8, Callee's Audio Data Outputting Software20655c9, and Callee's Visual Data Displaying Software 20655c10.Permitted Caller's Personal Data Selecting Software 20655c1 is thesoftware program described hereinafter. Dialing Software 20655c2 is thesoftware program described hereinafter. Caller's Device Pin-pointingSoftware 20655c3 is the software program described hereinafter. Map DataSending/Receiving Software 20655c4 is the software program describedhereinafter. Caller's Audiovisual Data Collecting Software 20655c5 isthe software program described hereinafter. Caller's InformationSending/Receiving Software 20655c6 is the software program describedhereinafter. Callee's Information Sending/Receiving Software 20655c6a isthe software program described hereinafter. Permitted Callee's PersonalData Displaying Software 20655c7 is the software program describedhereinafter. Map Displaying Software 20655c8 is the software programdescribed hereinafter. Callee's Audio Data Outputting Software 20655c9is the software program described hereinafter. Callee's Visual DataDisplaying Software 20655c10 is the software program describedhereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in RAM 206A(FIG. 1) of Callee's Device. In this embodiment, RAM 206A of Callee'sDevice includes Callee's Information Displaying Information Storage Area20655aA of which the data and the software programs stored therein aredescribed hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Callee'sInformation Displaying Information Storage Area 20655aA. In thisembodiment, Callee's Information Displaying Information Storage Area20655aA includes Callee's Information Displaying Data Storage Area20655bA and Callee's Information Displaying Software Storage Area20655cA. Callee's Information Displaying Data Storage Area 20655bAstores the data necessary to implement the present function on the sideof Callee's Device, such as the ones described hereinafter. Callee'sInformation Displaying Software Storage Area 20655cA stores the softwareprograms necessary to implement the present function on the side ofCallee's Device, such as the ones described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Callee'sInformation Displaying Data Storage Area 20655bA. In this embodiment,Callee's Information Displaying Data Storage Area 20655bA includesCaller's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655b1A, Callee's AudiovisualData Storage Area 20655b2A, Caller's Personal Data Storage Area20655b3A, Callee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b4A, Caller'sCalculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655b5A, Callee's Calculated GPS DataStorage Area 20655b6A, Caller's Map Data Storage Area 20655b7A, Callee'sMap Data Storage Area 20655b8A, and Work Area 20655b9A. Caller'sAudiovisual Data Storage Area 20655b1A stores the data describedhereinafter. Callee's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655b2A stores thedata described hereinafter. Caller's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b3Astores the data described hereinafter. Callee's Personal Data StorageArea 20655b4A stores the data described hereinafter. Caller's CalculatedGPS Data Storage Area 20655b5A stores the caller's calculated GPS datawhich represents the current geographic location of Caller's Device in(x, y, z) format. Callee's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655b6Astores the callee's calculated GPS data which represents the currentgeographic location of Callee's Device in (x, y, z) format. Caller's MapData Storage Area 20655b7A stores the map data representing thesurrounding area of the location indicated by the caller's calculatedGPS data. Callee's Map Data Storage Area 20655b8A stores the map datarepresenting the surrounding area of the location indicated by thecallee's calculated GPS data. Work Area 20655b9A is a storage areautilized to perform calculation and to temporarily store data.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Caller'sAudiovisual Data Storage Area 20655b1A. In this embodiment, Caller'sAudiovisual Data Storage Area 20655b1A includes Caller's Audio DataStorage Area 20655b1aA and Caller's Visual Data Storage Area 20655b1bA.Caller's Audio Data Storage Area 20655b1aA stores the caller's audiodata which represents the audio data sent from Caller's Device in awireless fashion. Caller's Visual Data Storage Area 20655b1bA stores thecaller's visual data which represents the visual data input sent fromCaller's Device in a wireless fashion.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Callee'sAudiovisual Data Storage Area 20655b2A. In this embodiment, Callee'sAudiovisual Data Storage Area 20655b2A includes Callee's Audio DataStorage Area 20655b2aA and Callee's Visual Data Storage Area 20655b2bA.Callee's Audio Data Storage Area 20655b2aA stores the callee's audiodata which represents the audio data input via Microphone 215 (FIG. 1)of Callee's Device. Callee's Visual Data Storage Area 20655b2bA storesthe callee's visual data which represents the visual data input via CCDUnit 214 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Caller's Personal DataStorage Area 20655b3A. In this embodiment, Caller's Personal DataStorage Area 20655b3A stores the caller's personal data which representthe personal data of the caller which are displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)of Caller's Device. In this embodiment, Caller's Personal Data StorageArea 20655b3A stores the caller's name, phone number, email address, andhome address.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Callee's Personal DataStorage Area 20655b4A. In this embodiment, Callee's Personal DataStorage Area 20655b4A comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Callee's PersonalData’ and ‘Permitted Callee's Personal Data Flag’. Column ‘Callee'sPersonal Data’ stores the callee's personal data which represent thepersonal data of the callee. Column ‘Permitted Callee's Personal DataFlag’ stores the permitted callee's personal data flag and eachpermitted callee's personal data flag represents whether thecorresponding callee's personal data is permitted to be displayed onCaller's Device. The permitted callee's personal data flag isrepresented by either ‘1’ or ‘0’ wherein ‘1’ indicates that thecorresponding callee's personal data is permitted to be displayed onCaller's Device, and ‘0’ indicates that the corresponding callee'spersonal data is not permitted to be displayed on Caller's Device. Inthis embodiment, Callee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b4A stores thefollowing data: callee's name and the corresponding permitted callee'spersonal data flag ‘1’; the callee's phone number and the correspondingpermitted callee's personal data flag ‘1’; the callee's email addressand the corresponding permitted caller's personal data flag ‘0’; thecallee's home address and the corresponding permitted callee's personaldata flag ‘0’; the callee's business address and the correspondingpermitted callee's personal data flag ‘0’; the callee's title and thecorresponding permitted callee's personal data flag ‘0’; the callee'shobby and the corresponding permitted callee's personal data flag ‘0’;the callee's blood type and the corresponding permitted callee'spersonal data flag ‘0’; the callee's gender and the correspondingpermitted callee's personal data flag ‘0’; the callee's age and thecorresponding permitted callee's personal data flag ‘0’; and callee'sdate of birth and the corresponding permitted callee's personal dataflag ‘0’.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in Callee'sInformation Displaying Software Storage Area 20655cA. In thisembodiment, Callee's Information Displaying Software Storage Area20655cA stores Permitted Callee's Personal Data Selecting Software20655c1A, Dialing Software 20655c2A, Callee's Device Pin-pointingSoftware 20655c3A, Map Data Sending/Receiving Software 20655c4A,Callee's Audiovisual Data Collecting Software 20655c5A, Callee'sInformation Sending/Receiving Software 20655c6A, Caller's InformationSending/Receiving Software 20655c6aA, Permitted Caller's Personal DataDisplaying Software 20655c7A, Map Displaying Software 20655c8A, Caller'sAudio Data Outputting Software 20655c9A, and Caller's Visual DataDisplaying Software 20655c10A. Permitted Callee's Personal DataSelecting Software 20655c1A is the software program describedhereinafter. Dialing Software 20655c2A is the software program describedhereinafter. Callee's Device Pin-pointing Software 20655c3A is thesoftware program described hereinafter. Map Data Sending/ReceivingSoftware 20655c4A is the software program described hereinafter.Callee's Audiovisual Data Collecting Software 20655c5A is the softwareprogram described hereinafter. Callee's Information Sending/ReceivingSoftware 20655c6A is the software program described hereinafter.Caller's Information Sending/Receiving Software 20655c6aA is thesoftware program described hereinafter. Permitted Caller's Personal DataDisplaying Software 20655c7A is the software program describedhereinafter. Map Displaying Software 20655c8A is the software programdescribed hereinafter. Caller's Audio Data Outputting Software 20655c9Ais the software program described hereinafter. Caller's Visual DataDisplaying Software 20655c10A is the software program describedhereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in Host H. In thisembodiment, Host H includes Caller/Callee Information Storage Area H55aof which the data and the software programs stored therein are describedhereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Caller/CalleeInformation Storage Area H55a. In this embodiment, Caller/CalleeInformation Storage Area H55a includes Caller/Callee Data Storage AreaH55b and Caller/Callee Software Storage Area H55c. Caller/Callee DataStorage Area H55b stores the data necessary to implement the presentfunction on the side of Host H, such as the ones described hereinafter.Caller/Callee Software Storage Area H55c stores the software programsnecessary to implement the present function on the side of Host H, suchas the ones described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Caller/CalleeData Storage Area H55b. In this embodiment, Caller/Callee Data StorageArea H55b includes Caller's Information Storage Area H55b1, Callee'sInformation Storage Area H55b2, Map Data Storage Area H55b3, Work Areah55b4, Caller's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area H55b5, and Callee'sCalculated GPS Data Storage Area H55b6. Caller's Information StorageArea H55b1 stores the Caller's Information received Caller's Device.Callee's Information Storage Area H55b2 stores the Callee's Informationreceived Callee's Device. Map Data Storage Area H55b3 stores the mapdata received from Caller's Device and Callee's Device. Work Area H55b4is a storage area utilized to perform calculation and to temporarilystore data. Caller's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area H55b5 stores thecaller's calculated GPS data. Callee's Calculated GPS Data Storage AreaH55b6 stores the callee's calculated GPS data.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in Caller/CalleeSoftware Storage Area H55c. In this embodiment, Caller/Callee SoftwareStorage Area H55c stores Dialing Software H55c2, Caller's DevicePin-pointing Software H55c3, Callee's Device Pin-pointing SoftwareH55c3a, Map Data Sending/Receiving Software H55c4, Caller's InformationSending/Receiving Software H55c6, and Callee's InformationSending/Receiving Software H55c6a. Dialing Software H55c2 is thesoftware program described hereinafter. Caller's Device Pin-pointingSoftware H55c3 is the software program described hereinafter. Callee'sDevice Pin-pointing Software H55c3a is the software program describedhereinafter. Map Data Sending/Receiving Software H55c4 is the softwareprogram described hereinafter. Caller's Information Sending/ReceivingSoftware H55c6 is the software program described hereinafter. Callee'sInformation Sending/Receiving Software H55c6a is the software programdescribed hereinafter.

The following paragraphs primarily illustrate the sequence to output theCaller's Information (which is defined hereinafter) from Callee'sDevice.

This paragraph illustrates Permitted Caller's Personal Data SelectingSoftware 20655c1 stored in Caller's Information Displaying SoftwareStorage Area 20655c of Caller's Device, which selects the permittedcaller's personal data to be displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Callee'sDevice. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Deviceretrieves all of the caller's personal data from Caller's Personal DataStorage Area 20655b3 (S1). CPU 211 then displays a list of caller'spersonal data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). The caller selects, by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system, the caller'spersonal data permitted to be displayed on Callee's Device (S3). Thepermitted caller's personal data flag of the data selected in S3 isregistered as ‘1’ (S4).

This paragraph illustrates Dialing Software H55c2 stored inCaller/Callee Software Storage Area H55c of Host H, Dialing Software20655c2 stored in Caller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area20655c of Caller's Device, and Dialing Software 20655c2A stored inCallee's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655cA ofCallee's Device, which enables to connect between Caller's Device andCallee's Device via Host H in a wireless fashion. In this embodiment, aconnection is established between Caller's Device and Host H (S1). Next,a connection is established between Host H and Callee's Device (S2). Asa result, Caller's Device and Callee's Device are able to exchangeaudiovisual data, text data, and various types of data with each other.The connection is maintained until Caller's Device, Host H, or Callee'sDevice terminates the connection.

This paragraph illustrates Caller's Device Pin-pointing Software H55c3stored in Caller/Callee Software Storage Area H55c of Host H andCaller's Device Pin-pointing Software 20655c3 stored in Caller'sInformation Displaying Software Storage Area 20655c of Caller's Device,which identifies the current geographic location of Caller's Device. Inthis embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device collects the GPSraw data from the near base stations (S1). CPU 211 sends the raw GPSdata to Host H (S2). Upon receiving the raw GPS data (S3), Host Hproduces the caller's calculated GPS data by referring to the raw GPSdata (S4). Host H stores the caller's calculated GPS data in Caller'sCalculated GPS Data Storage Area H55b5 (S5). Host H then retrieves thecaller's calculated GPS data from Caller's Calculated GPS Data StorageArea H55b5 (S6), and sends the data to Caller's Device (S7). Uponreceiving the caller's calculated GPS data from Host H (S8), CPU 211stores the data in Caller's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655b5(S9). Here, the GPS raw data are the primitive data utilized to producethe caller's calculated GPS data, and the caller's calculated GPS datais the data representing the location of Caller's Device in (x, y, z)format. The sequence described in the present paragraph is repeatedperiodically.

This paragraph illustrates another embodiment of the sequence describedhereinbefore in which the entire process is performed solely by Caller'sDevice Pin-pointing Software 20655c3 stored in Caller's InformationDisplaying Software Storage Area 20655c of Caller's Device. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device collects the raw GPSdata from the near base stations (S1). CPU 211 then produces thecaller's calculated GPS data by referring to the raw GPS data (S2), andstores the caller's calculated GPS data in Caller's Calculated GPS DataStorage Area 20655b5 (S3). The sequence described in the presentparagraph is repeated periodically.

This paragraph illustrates Map Data Sending/Receiving Software H55c4stored in Caller/Callee Software Storage Area H55c of Host H and MapData Sending/Receiving Software 20655c4 stored in Caller's InformationDisplaying Software Storage Area 20655c of Caller's Device, which sendsand receives the map data. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCaller's Device retrieves the caller's calculated GPS data from Caller'sCalculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655b5 (S1), and sends the data toHost H (S2). Upon receiving the calculated GPS data from Caller's Device(S3), Host H identifies the map data in Map Data Storage Area H55b3(S4). Here, the map data represents the surrounding area of the locationindicated by the caller's calculated GPS data. Host H retrieves the mapdata from Map Data Storage Area H55b3 (S5), and sends the data toCaller's Device (S6). Upon receiving the map data from Host H (S7),Caller's Device stores the data in Caller's Map Data Storage Area20655b7 (S8). The sequence described in the present paragraph isrepeated periodically.

This paragraph illustrates Caller's Audiovisual Data Collecting Software20655c5 stored in Caller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area20655c of Caller's Device, which collects the audiovisual data of thecaller to be sent to Callee's Device via Antenna 218 (FIG. 1) thereof.CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device retrieves the caller's audiovisualdata from CCD Unit 214 and Microphone 215 (S1). CPU 211 then stores thecaller's audio data in Caller's Audio Data Storage Area 20655b1a (S2),and the caller's visual data in Caller's Visual Data Storage Area20655b1b (S3). The sequence described in the present paragraph isrepeated periodically.

This paragraph illustrates Caller's Information Sending/ReceivingSoftware H55c6 stored in Caller/Callee Software Storage Area H55c ofHost H and Caller's Information Sending/Receiving Software 20655c6stored in Caller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655cof Caller's Device, which sends and receives the Caller's Information(which is defined hereinafter) between Caller's Device and Host H. Inthis embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device retrieves thepermitted caller's personal data from Caller's Personal Data StorageArea 20655b3 (S1). CPU 211 retrieves the caller's calculated GPS datafrom Caller's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655b5 (S2). CPU 211retrieves the map data from Caller's Map Data Storage Area 20655b7 (S3).CPU 211 retrieves the caller's audio data from Caller's Audio DataStorage Area 20655b1a (S4). CPU 211 retrieves the caller's visual datafrom Caller's Visual Data Storage Area 20655b1b (S5). CPU 211 then sendsthe data retrieved in S1 through S5 (collectively defined as the‘Caller's Information’ hereinafter) to Host H (S6). Upon receiving theCaller's Information from Caller's Device (S7), Host H stores theCaller's Information in Caller's Information Storage Area H55b1 (S8).The sequence described in the present paragraph is repeatedperiodically.

This paragraph illustrates Caller's Information Sending/ReceivingSoftware H55c6 stored in Caller/Callee Software Storage Area H55c ofHost H and Caller's Information Sending/Receiving Software 20655c6aAstored in Caller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655cof Caller's Device, which sends and receives the Caller's Informationbetween Host H and Callee's Device. In this embodiment, Host H retrievesthe Caller's Information from Caller's Information Storage Area H55b1(S1), and sends the Caller's Information to Callee's Device (S2). CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device receives the Caller's Information fromHost H (S3). CPU 211 stores the permitted caller's personal data inCaller's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b3A (S4). CPU 211 stores thecaller's calculated GPS data in Caller's Calculated GPS Data StorageArea 20655b5A (S5). CPU 211 stores the map data in Caller's Map DataStorage Area 20655b7A (S6). CPU 211 stores the caller's audio data inCaller's Audio Data Storage Area 20655b1aA (S7). CPU 211 stores thecaller's visual data in Caller's Visual Data Storage Area 20655b1bA(S8). The sequence described in the present paragraph is repeatedperiodically.

This paragraph illustrates Permitted Caller's Personal Data DisplayingSoftware 20655c7A stored in Callee's Information Displaying SoftwareStorage Area 20655cA of Callee's Device, which displays the permittedcaller's personal data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device retrieves the permittedcaller's personal data from Caller's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b3A(S1). CPU 211 then displays the permitted caller's personal data on LCD201 (FIG. 1) (S2). The sequence described in the present paragraph isrepeated periodically.

This paragraph illustrates Map Displaying Software 20655c8A stored inCallee's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655cA ofCallee's Device, which displays the map representing the surroundingarea of the location indicated by the caller's calculated GPS data. Inthis embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device retrieves thecaller's calculated GPS data from Caller's Calculated GPS Data StorageArea 20655b5A (S1). CPU 211 then retrieves the map data from Caller'sMap Data Storage Area 20655b7A (S2), and arranges on the map data thecaller's current location icon in accordance with the caller'scalculated GPS data (S3). Here, the caller's current location icon is anicon which represents the location of Caller's Device in the map data.The map with the caller's current location icon is displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) (S4). The sequence described in the present paragraph isrepeated periodically.

This paragraph illustrates Caller's Audio Data Outputting Software20655c9A stored in Caller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area20655c of Caller's Device, which outputs the caller's audio data fromSpeaker 216 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Callee's Device retrieves the caller's audio data fromCaller's Audio Data Storage Area 20655b1aA (S1). CPU 211 then outputsthe caller's audio data from Speaker 216 (FIG. 1) (S2). The sequencedescribed in the present paragraph is repeated periodically.

This paragraph illustrates Caller's Visual Data Displaying Software20655c10A stored in Callee's Information Displaying Software StorageArea 20655cA of Callee's Device, which displays the caller's visual dataon LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Callee's Device retrieves the caller's visual data fromCaller's Visual Data Storage Area 20655b1bA (S1). CPU 211 then displaysthe caller's visual data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). The sequencedescribed in the present paragraph is repeated periodically.

The following paragraphs primarily illustrate the sequence to output theCallee's Information (which is defined hereinafter) from Caller'sDevice.

This paragraph illustrates Permitted Callee's Personal Data SelectingSoftware 20655c1A stored in Callee's Information Displaying SoftwareStorage Area 20655cA of Callee's Device, which selects the permittedcallee's personal data to be displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Caller'sDevice. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Deviceretrieves all of the callee's personal data from Callee's Personal DataStorage Area 20655b4A (S1). CPU 211 then displays a list of callee'spersonal data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). The callee selects, by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system, the callee'spersonal data permitted to be displayed on Caller's Device (S3). Thepermitted callee's personal data flag of the data selected in S3 isregistered as ‘1’ (S4).

This paragraph illustrates Dialing Software H55c2 stored inCaller/Callee Software Storage Area H55c of Host H, Dialing Software20655c2A stored in Callee's Information Displaying Software Storage Area20655cA of Callee's Device, and Dialing Software 20655c2 stored inCaller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655c of Caller'sDevice, which enables to connect between Callee's Device and Caller'sDevice via Host H in a wireless fashion. In this embodiment, aconnection is established between Callee's Device and Host H (S1). Next,a connection is established between Host H and Caller's Device (S2). Asa result, Callee's Device and Caller's Device are able to exchangeaudiovisual data, text data, and various types of data with each other.The sequence described in the present paragraph is not necessarilyimplemented if the connection between Caller's Device and Callee'sDevice is established as described hereinbefore. The sequence describedin the present paragraph may be implemented if the connection isaccidentally terminated by Callee's Device and the connection process isinitiated by Callee's Device.

This paragraph illustrates Callee's Device Pin-pointing Software H55c3astored in Caller/Callee Software Storage Area H55c of Host H andCallee's Device Pin-pointing Software 20655c3A stored in Callee'sInformation Displaying Software Storage Area 20655cA of Callee's Device,which identifies the current geographic location of Callee's Device. Inthis embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device collects the GPSraw data from the near base stations (S1). CPU 211 sends the raw GPSdata to Host H (S2). Upon receiving the raw GPS data (S3), Host Hproduces the callee's calculated GPS data by referring to the raw GPSdata (S4). Host H stores the callee's calculated GPS data in Callee'sCalculated GPS Data Storage Area H55b6 (S5). Host H then retrieves thecallee's calculated GPS data from Callee's Calculated GPS Data StorageArea H55b6 (S6), and sends the data to Callee's Device (S7). Uponreceiving the callee's calculated GPS data from Host H (S8), CPU 211stores the data in Callee's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655b6A(S9). Here, the GPS raw data are the primitive data utilized to producethe callee's calculated GPS data, and the callee's calculated GPS datais the data representing the location of Callee's Device in (x, y, z)format. The sequence described in the present paragraph is repeatedperiodically.

This paragraph illustrates another embodiment of the sequence describedhereinbefore in which the entire process is performed solely by Callee'sDevice Pin-pointing Software 20655c3A stored in Callee's InformationDisplaying Software Storage Area 20655cA of Callee's Device. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device collects the raw GPSdata from the near base stations (S1). CPU 211 then produces thecallee's calculated GPS data by referring to the raw GPS data (S2), andstores the callee's calculated GPS data in Callee's Calculated GPS DataStorage Area 20655b6A (S3). The sequence described in the presentparagraph is repeated periodically.

This paragraph illustrates Map Data Sending/Receiving Software H55c4stored in Caller/Callee Software Storage Area H55c of Host H and MapData Sending/Receiving Software 20655c4A stored in Callee's InformationDisplaying Software Storage Area 20655cA of Callee's Device, which sendsand receives the map data. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCallee's Device retrieves the callee's calculated GPS data from Callee'sCalculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655b6A (S1), and sends the data toHost H (S2). Upon receiving the calculated GPS data from Callee's Device(S3), Host H identifies the map data in Map Data Storage Area H55b3(S4). Here, the map data represents the surrounding area of the locationindicated by the callee's calculated GPS data. Host H retrieves the mapdata from Map Data Storage Area H55b3 (S5), and sends the data toCallee's Device (S6). Upon receiving the map data from Host H (S7),Callee's Device stores the data in Callee's Map Data Storage Area20655b8A (S8). The sequence described in the present paragraph isrepeated periodically.

This paragraph illustrates Callee's Audiovisual Data Collecting Software20655c5A stored in Callee's Information Displaying Software Storage Area20655cA of Callee's Device, which collects the audiovisual data of thecallee to be sent to Caller's Device via Antenna 218 (FIG. 1) thereof.CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device retrieves the callee's audiovisualdata from CCD Unit 214 and Microphone 215 (S1). CPU 211 then stores thecallee's audio data in Callee's Audio Data Storage Area 20655b2aA (S2),and the callee's visual data in Callee's Visual Data Storage Area20655b2bA (S3). The sequence described in the present paragraph isrepeated periodically.

This paragraph illustrates Callee's Information Sending/ReceivingSoftware H55c6a stored in Caller/Callee Software Storage Area H55c ofHost H and Callee's Information Sending/Receiving Software 20655c6Astored in Callee's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655cAof Callee's Device, which sends and receives the Callee's Information(which is defined hereinafter) between Callee's Device and Host H. Inthis embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device retrieves thepermitted callee's personal data from Callee's Personal Data StorageArea 20655b4A (S1). CPU 211 retrieves the callee's calculated GPS datafrom Callee's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655b6A (S2). CPU 211retrieves the map data from Callee's Map Data Storage Area 20655b8A(S3). CPU 211 retrieves the callee's audio data from Callee's Audio DataStorage Area 20655b2aA (S4). CPU 211 retrieves the callee's visual datafrom Callee's Visual Data Storage Area 20655b2bA (S5). CPU 211 thensends the data retrieved in S1 through S5 (collectively defined as the‘Callee's Information’ hereinafter) to Host H (S6). Upon receiving theCallee's Information from Callee's Device (S7), Host H stores theCallee's Information in Callee's Information Storage Area H55b2 (S8).The sequence described in the present paragraph is repeatedperiodically.

This paragraph illustrates Callee's Information Sending/ReceivingSoftware H55c6a stored in Caller/Callee Software Storage Area H55c ofHost H and Callee's Information Sending/Receiving Software 20655c6astored in Caller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655cof Caller's Device, which sends and receives the Callee's Informationbetween Host H and Caller's Device. In this embodiment, Host H retrievesthe Callee's Information from Callee's Information Storage Area H55b2(S1), and sends the Callee's Information to Caller's Device (S2). CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device receives the Callee's Information fromHost H (S3). CPU 211 stores the permitted callee's personal data inCallee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b4 (S4). CPU 211 stores thecallee's calculated GPS data in Callee's Calculated GPS Data StorageArea 20655b6 (S5). CPU 211 stores the map data in Callee's Map DataStorage Area 20655b8 (S6). CPU 211 stores the callee's audio data inCallee's Audio Data Storage Area 20655b2a (S7). CPU 211 stores thecallee's visual data in Callee's Visual Data Storage Area 20655b2b (S8).The sequence described in the present paragraph is repeatedperiodically.

This paragraph illustrates Permitted Callee's Personal Data DisplayingSoftware 20655c7 stored in Caller's Information Displaying SoftwareStorage Area 20655c of Caller's Device, which displays the permittedcallee's personal data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device retrieves the permittedcallee's personal data from Callee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b4(S1). CPU 211 then displays the permitted callee's personal data on LCD201 (FIG. 1) (S2). The sequence described in the present paragraph isrepeated periodically.

This paragraph illustrates Map Displaying Software 20655c8 stored inCaller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655c of Caller'sDevice, which displays the map representing the surrounding area of thelocation indicated by the callee's calculated GPS data. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device retrieves the callee'scalculated GPS data from Callee's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area20655b6 (S1). CPU 211 then retrieves the map data from Callee's Map DataStorage Area 20655b8 (S2), and arranges on the map data the callee'scurrent location icon in accordance with the callee's calculated GPSdata (S3). Here, the callee's current location icon is an icon whichrepresents the location of Callee's Device in the map data. The map withthe callee's current location icon is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)(S4). The sequence described in the present paragraph is repeatedperiodically.

This paragraph illustrates Callee's Audio Data Outputting Software20655c9 stored in Caller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area20655c of Caller's Device, which outputs the callee's audio data fromSpeaker 216 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Caller's Device retrieves the callee's audio data fromCallee's Audio Data Storage Area 20655b2a (S1). CPU 211 then outputs thecaller's audio data from Speaker 216 (FIG. 1) (S2). The sequencedescribed in the present paragraph is repeated periodically.

This paragraph illustrates Callee's Visual Data Displaying Software20655c10 stored in Caller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area20655c of Caller's Device, which displays the callee's visual data onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Caller's Device retrieves the callee's visual data fromCallee's Visual Data Storage Area 20655b2b (S1). CPU 211 then displaysthe callee's visual data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). The sequencedescribed in the present paragraph is repeated periodically.

<<Shortcut Icon Displaying Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the shortcut icon displayingfunction which displays one or more of shortcut icons on LCD 201(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200. The user of Communication Device200 can execute the software programs in a convenient manner byselecting (e.g., clicking or double clicking) the shortcut icons. Theforegoing software programs may be any software programs described inthis specification.

This paragraph illustrates the shortcut icons displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 by implementing the presentfunction. In this embodiment, three shortcut icons are displayed on LCD201 (FIG. 1), i.e., Shortcut Icon#1, Shortcut Icon#2, and ShortcutIcon#3. The user of Communication Device 200 can execute the softwareprograms by selecting (e.g., clicking or double clicking) one of theshortcut icons. For example, assume that Shortcut Icon#1 represents MSWord 97. By selecting (e.g., clicking or double clicking) ShortcutIcon#1, the user can execute MS Word 97 installed in CommunicationDevice 200 or Host H. Three shortcut icons are illustrated in thepresent paragraph, however, only for purposes of simplifying theexplanation of the present function. Therefore, as many shortcut iconsequivalent to the number of the software programs described in thisspecification may be displayed on LCD 201, and the correspondingsoftware programs may be executed by implementing the present function.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in RAM 206 (FIG.1). In this embodiment, RAM 206 includes Shortcut Icon DisplayingInformation Storage Area 20659a of which the data and the softwareprograms stored therein are described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Shortcut IconDisplaying Information Storage Area 20659a. In this embodiment, ShortcutIcon Displaying Information Storage Area 20659a includes Shortcut IconDisplaying Data Storage Area 20659b and Shortcut Icon DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20659c. Shortcut Icon Displaying Data Storage Area20659b stores the data necessary to implement the present function, suchas the ones described hereinafter. Shortcut Icon Displaying SoftwareStorage Area 20659c stores the software programs necessary to implementthe present function, such as the ones described hereinafter.

The data and/or the software programs stored in Shortcut Icon DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20659c may be downloaded from Host H.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Shortcut IconDisplaying Data Storage Area 20659b. In this embodiment, Shortcut IconDisplaying Data Storage Area 20659b includes Shortcut Icon Image DataStorage Area 20659b1, Shortcut Icon Location Data Storage Area 20659b2,Shortcut Icon Link Data Storage Area 20659b3, and Selected Shortcut IconData Storage Area 20659b4. Shortcut Icon Image Data Storage Area 20659b1stores the data described hereinafter. Shortcut Icon Location DataStorage Area 20659b2 stores the data described hereinafter. ShortcutIcon Link Data Storage Area 20659b3 stores the data describedhereinafter. Selected Shortcut Icon Data Storage Area 20659b4 stores thedata described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Shortcut Icon Image DataStorage Area 20659b1. In this embodiment, Shortcut Icon Image DataStorage Area 20659b1 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Shortcut Icon ID’ and‘Shortcut Icon Image Data’. Column ‘Shortcut Icon ID’ stores theshortcut icon IDs, and each shortcut icon ID is the identification ofthe corresponding shortcut icon image data stored in column ‘ShortcutIcon Image Data’. Column ‘Shortcut Icon Image Data’ stores the shortcuticon image data, and each shortcut icon image data is the image data ofthe shortcut icon displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) as describedhereinbefore. In this embodiment, Shortcut Icon Image Data Storage Area20659b1 stores the following data: the shortcut icon ID ‘ShortcutIcon#1’ and the corresponding shortcut icon image data ‘Shortcut IconImage Data#1; the shortcut icon ID ‘Shortcut Icon#2’ and thecorresponding shortcut icon image data ‘Shortcut Icon Image Data#2’; theshortcut icon ID ‘Shortcut Icon#3’ and the corresponding shortcut iconimage data ‘Shortcut Icon Image Data#3’; and the shortcut icon ID‘Shortcut Icon#4’ and the corresponding shortcut icon image data‘Shortcut Icon Image Data#4’.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Shortcut Icon LocationData Storage Area 20659b2. In this embodiment, Shortcut Icon LocationData Storage Area 20659b2 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Shortcut IconID’ and ‘Shortcut Icon Location Data’. Column ‘Shortcut Icon ID’ storesthe shortcut icon IDs described hereinbefore. Column ‘Shortcut IconLocation Data’ stores the shortcut icon location data, and each shortcuticon location data indicates the location displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)in (x,y) format of the shortcut icon image data of the correspondingshortcut icon ID. In this embodiment, Shortcut Icon Location DataStorage Area 20659b2 stores the following data: the shortcut icon ID‘Shortcut Icon#1’ and the corresponding shortcut icon location data‘Shortcut Icon Location Data#1; the shortcut icon ID ‘Shortcut Icon#2’and the corresponding shortcut icon location data ‘Shortcut IconLocation Data#2’; the shortcut icon ID ‘Shortcut Icon#3’ and thecorresponding shortcut icon location data ‘Shortcut Icon LocationData#3’; and the shortcut icon ID ‘Shortcut Icon#4’ and thecorresponding shortcut icon location data ‘Shortcut Icon LocationData#4’.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Shortcut Icon Link DataStorage Area 20659b3. In this embodiment, Shortcut Icon Link DataStorage Area 20659b3 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Shortcut Icon ID’ and‘Shortcut Icon Link Data’. Column ‘Shortcut Icon ID’ stores the shortcuticon IDs described hereinbefore. Column ‘Shortcut Icon Link Data’ storesthe shortcut icon link data, and each shortcut icon link data representsthe location in Communication Device 200 of the software program storedtherein represented by the shortcut icon of the corresponding shortcuticon ID. In this embodiment, Shortcut Icon Link Data Storage Area20659b3 stores the following data: the shortcut icon ID ‘ShortcutIcon#1’ and the corresponding shortcut icon link data ‘Shortcut IconLink Data#1’; the shortcut icon ID ‘ Shortcut Icon#2’ and thecorresponding shortcut icon link data ‘Shortcut Icon Link Data#2’; theshortcut icon ID ‘Shortcut Icon#3’ and the corresponding shortcut iconlink data ‘Shortcut Icon Link Data#3’; and the shortcut icon ID‘Shortcut Icon#4’ and the corresponding shortcut icon link data‘Shortcut Icon Link Data#4’. The foregoing software program may be anysoftware program described in this specification.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Selected Shortcut IconData Storage Area 20659b4. In this embodiment, Selected Shortcut IconData Storage Area 20659b4 stores one or more of shortcut icon IDs. Onlythe shortcut icon image data of the shortcut icon IDs stored in SelectedShortcut Icon Data Storage Area 20659b4 are displayed on LCD 201 (FIG.1). In this embodiment, Selected Shortcut Icon Data Storage Area 20659b4stores the following data: the shortcut icon IDs ‘Shortcut Icon#1’,‘Shortcut Icon#2’, and ‘Shortcut Icon#3’, which means that only theshortcut icon image data corresponding to ‘Shortcut Icon#1’, ‘ShortcutIcon#2’, and ‘Shortcut Icon#3’ are displayed on LCD 201.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in Shortcut IconDisplaying Software Storage Area 20659c. In this embodiment, ShortcutIcon Displaying Software Storage Area 20659c stores Shortcut IconDisplaying Software 20659c1, Software Executing Software 20659c2,Shortcut Icon Location Data Changing Software 20659c3, and SoftwareExecuting Software 20659c4. Shortcut Icon Displaying Software 20659c1 isthe software program described hereinafter. Software Executing Software20659c2 is the software program described hereinafter. Shortcut IconLocation Data Changing Software 20659c3 is the software programdescribed hereinafter. Software Executing Software 20659c4 is thesoftware program described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates Shortcut Icon Displaying Software 20659c1stored in Shortcut Icon Displaying Software Storage Area 20659c ofCommunication Device 200, which displays the shortcut icon image datadisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) refers to the shortcut icon IDs stored inSelected Shortcut Icon Data Storage Area 20659b4 to identify theshortcut icon image data to be displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). CPU211 then retrieves the shortcut icon image data of the correspondingshortcut icon IDs identified in S1 from Shortcut Icon Image Data StorageArea 20659b1 (S2). CPU 211 further retrieves the shortcut icon locationdata of the corresponding shortcut icon IDs identified in S1 fromShortcut Icon Location Data Storage Area 20659b2 (S3). CPU 211 displayson LCD 201 (FIG. 1) the shortcut icon image data thereafter (S4).

This paragraph illustrates Software Executing Software 20659c2 stored inShortcut Icon Displaying Software Storage Area 20659c of CommunicationDevice 200, which executes the corresponding software program uponselecting the shortcut icon image data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200. In this embodiment, the user of CommunicationDevice 200 selects the shortcut icon image data displayed on LCD 201 byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then identifies the shortcut icon ID of theshortcut icon image data selected in S1 (S2). CPU 211 identifies theshortcut icon link data stored in Shortcut Icon Link Data Storage Area20659b3 from the shortcut icon ID identified in S2 (S3), and executesthe corresponding software program (S4).

This paragraph illustrates Shortcut Icon Location Data Changing Software20659c3 stored in Shortcut Icon Displaying Software Storage Area 20659cof Communication Device 200, which enables the user of CommunicationDevice 200 to change the location of the shortcut icon image datadisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, the user ofCommunication Device 200 selects the shortcut icon image data displayedon LCD 201 (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then identifies the shortcut icon IDof the shortcut icon image data selected in S1 (S2). The user moves theshortcut icon selected in S1 by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) orvia voice recognition system (S3). CPU 211 then identifies the newlocation thereof (S4), and updates the shortcut icon location datastored in Shortcut Icon Location Data Storage Area 20659b2 (S5).

<<Task Tray Icon Displaying Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the task tray icon displayingfunction which displays one or more of task tray icons on LCD 201(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200. The user of Communication Device200 can identify the software programs executed in background in aconvenient manner. The foregoing software programs may be any softwareprograms described in this specification.

This paragraph illustrates the task tray icons displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 by implementing the presentfunction. In this embodiment, Display Area 20160DA includes Task TrayIcons Display Area 20660DA1 which is displayed at the lower rightportion of LCD 201. Three task tray icons are displayed Task Tray IconsDisplay Area 20660DA1, i.e., Task Tray Icon#1, Task Tray Icon#2, andTask Tray Icon#3, by which the user of Communication Device 200 canidentify the software programs executed in background in a convenientmanner, i.e., by observing Task Tray Icons Display Area 20660DA1. Threetask tray icons are illustrated in the present paragraph, however, onlyfor purposes of simplifying the explanation of the present function.Therefore, as many task tray icons equivalent to the number of thesoftware programs described in this specification may be displayed inTask Tray Icons Display Area 20660DA1, and the corresponding softwareprograms executed in background by implementing the present function.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in RAM 206 (FIG.1). In this embodiment, RAM 206 includes Task Tray Icon DisplayingInformation Storage Area 20660a of which the data and the softwareprograms stored therein are described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Task Tray IconDisplaying Information Storage Area 20660a. In this embodiment, TaskTray Icon Displaying Information Storage Area 20660a includes Task TrayIcon Displaying Data Storage Area 20660b and Task Tray Icon DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20660c. Task Tray Icon Displaying Data StorageArea 20660b stores the data necessary to implement the present function,such as the ones described hereinafter. Task Tray Icon DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20660c stores the software programs necessary toimplement the present function, such as the ones described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Task Tray IconDisplaying Data Storage Area 20660b. In this embodiment, Task Tray IconDisplaying Data Storage Area 20660b includes Task Tray Icon Image DataStorage Area 20660b1, Task Tray Icon Link Data Storage Area 20660b3, andSelected Task Tray Icon Data Storage Area 20660b4. Task Tray Icon ImageData Storage Area 20660b1 stores the data described hereinafter. TaskTray Icon Link Data Storage Area 20660b3 stores the data describedhereinafter. Selected Task Tray Icon Data Storage Area 20660b4 storesthe data described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Task Tray Icon Image DataStorage Area 20660b1. In this embodiment, Task Tray Icon Image DataStorage Area 20660b1 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Task Tray Icon ID’and ‘Task Tray Icon Image Data’. Column ‘Task Tray Icon ID’ stores thetask tray icon IDs, and each task tray icon ID is the identification ofthe corresponding task tray icon image data stored in column ‘Task TrayIcon Image Data’. Column ‘Task Tray Icon Image Data’ stores the tasktray icon image data, and each task tray icon image data is the imagedata of the task tray icon displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) as describedhereinbefore. In this embodiment, Task Tray Icon Image Data Storage Area20660b1 stores the following data: the task tray icon ID ‘Task TrayIcon#1’ and the corresponding task tray icon image data ‘Task Tray IconImage Data#1’; the task tray icon ID ‘Task Tray Icon#2’ and thecorresponding task tray icon image data ‘Task Tray Icon Image Data#2’;the task tray icon ID ‘Task Tray Icon#3’ and the corresponding task trayicon image data ‘Task Tray Icon Image Data#3’; and the task tray icon ID‘Task Tray Icon#4’ and the corresponding task tray icon image data ‘TaskTray Icon Image Data#4’.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Task Tray Icon Link DataStorage Area 20660b3. In this embodiment, Task Tray Icon Link DataStorage Area 20660b3 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Task Tray Icon ID’and ‘Task Tray Icon Link Data’. Column ‘Task Tray Icon ID’ stores thetask tray icon IDs described hereinbefore. Column ‘Task Tray Icon LinkData’ stores the task tray icon link data, and each task tray icon linkdata represents the location in Communication Device 200 of the softwareprogram stored therein represented by the task tray icon of thecorresponding task tray icon ID. In this embodiment, Task Tray Icon LinkData Storage Area 20660b3 stores the following data: the task tray iconID ‘Task Tray Icon#1’ and the corresponding task tray icon link data‘Task Tray Icon Link Data#1’; the task tray icon ID ‘Task Tray Icon#2’and the corresponding task tray icon link data ‘Task Tray Icon LinkData#2’; the task tray icon ID ‘Task Tray Icon#3’ and the correspondingtask tray icon link data ‘Task Tray Icon Link Data#3’; and the task trayicon ID ‘Task Tray Icon#4’ and the corresponding task tray icon linkdata ‘Task Tray Icon Link Data#4’. The foregoing software programs maybe of any software programs described in this specification.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Selected Task Tray IconData Storage Area 20660b4. In this embodiment, Selected Task Tray IconData Storage Area 20660b4 stores one or more of task tray icon IDs. Onlythe task tray icon image data of the task tray icon IDs stored inSelected Task Tray Icon Data Storage Area 20660b4 are displayed in TaskTray Icons Display Area 20660DA1. In this embodiment, Selected Task TrayIcon Data Storage Area 20660b4 stores the following data: the task trayicon IDs ‘Task Tray Icon#1’, ‘Task Tray Icon#2’, and ‘Task Tray Icon#3’,which means that only the task tray icon image data corresponding to‘Task Tray Icon#1’, ‘Task Tray Icon#2’, and ‘Task Tray Icon#3’ aredisplayed in Task Tray Icons Display Area 20660DA1.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in Task TrayIcon Displaying Software Storage Area 20660c. In this embodiment, TaskTray Icon Displaying Software Storage Area 20660c stores SoftwareExecuting Software 20660c2 and Software Executing Software 20660c4.Software Executing Software 20660c2 is the software program describedhereinafter. Software Executing Software 20660c4 is the software programdescribed hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates Software Executing Software 20660c2 stored inTask Tray Icon Displaying Software Storage Area 20660c of CommunicationDevice 200, which executes the corresponding software program inbackground and displays the corresponding task tray icon image data onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) refers to Selected Task Tray Icon Data Storage Area 20660b4(S1) to identify the task tray IDs stored therein (S2). CPU 211identifies the task tray icon link data stored in Task Tray Icon LinkData Storage Area 20660b3 of the corresponding task tray icon IDsidentified in S2 (S3), and executes the corresponding software program(S4). CPU 211 then retrieves the task tray icon image data of thecorresponding task tray icon IDs identified in S2 from Task Tray IconImage Data Storage Area 20660b1 (S5). CPU 211 displays the task trayicon image data in Task Tray Icons Display Area 20660DA1 thereafter(S6).

<<OS Updating Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the OS updating function whichupdates the operating system of Communication Device 200 in a wirelessfashion. In other words, Communication Device 200 downloads the portionof the operating system of the latest version from Host H via Antenna218 (FIG. 1).

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in RAM 206 (FIG.1). In this embodiment, RAM 206 includes Operating System 20663OS ofwhich the data stored therein are described hereinafter, and OS UpdatingInformation Storage Area 20663a of which the data and the softwareprograms stored therein are described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Operating System 20663OS.In this embodiment, Operating System 20663OS includes Battery Controller20663OSa, CCD Unit Controller 20663OSb, Flash Light Unit Controller20663OSc, Indicator Controller 20663OSd, Input Device Controller20663OSe, LCD Controller 20663OSf, LED Controller 20663OSg, Memory CardInterface Controller 20663OSh, Microphone Controller 20663OSi,Photometer Controller 20663OSj, RAM Controller 20663OSk, ROM Controller20663OSl, Signal Processor Controller 20663OSm, Signal ProcessorController 20663OSn, Solar Panel Controller 20663OSo, Speaker Controller20663OSp, Vibrator Controller 20663OSq, Video Processor Controller20663OSr, Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSs, Wireless ReceiverController 20663OSt, Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSu, WirelessTransmitter Controller 20663OSv, Wireless Transmitter Controller20663OSw, and Wireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSx. BatteryController 20663OSa is a controller which controls Battery 230 (notshown). CCD Unit Controller 20663OSb is a controller which controls CCDUnit 214 (not shown). Flash Light Unit Controller 20663OSc is acontroller which controls Flash Light Unit 220 (not shown). IndicatorController 20663OSd is a controller which controls Indicator 212 (notshown). Input Device Controller 20663OSe is a controller which controlsInput Device 210 (not shown). LCD Controller 20663OSf is a controllerwhich controls LCD 201 (not shown). LED Controller 20663OSg is acontroller which controls LED 219 (not shown). Memory Card InterfaceController 20663OSh is a controller which controls Memory Card Interface221 (not shown). Microphone Controller 20663OSi is a controller whichcontrols Microphone 215 (not shown). Photometer Controller 20663OSj is acontroller which controls Photometer 232 (not shown). RAM Controller20663OSk is a controller which controls RAM 206 (not shown). ROMController 20663OSl is a controller which controls ROM 207 (not shown).Signal Processor Controller 20663OSm is a controller which controlsSignal Processor 205 (not shown). Signal Processor Controller 20663OSnis a controller which controls Signal Processor 208 (not shown). SolarPanel Controller 20663OSo is a controller which controls Solar Panel 229(not shown). Speaker Controller 20663OSp is a controller which controlsSpeaker 216L (not shown). Vibrator Controller 20663OSq is a controllerwhich controls Vibrator 217 (not shown). Video Processor Controller20663OSr is a controller which controls Video Processor 202 (not shown).Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSs is a controller which controlsWireless Receiver 224 (not shown). Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OStis a controller which controls Wireless Receiver 225 (not shown).Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSu is a controller which controlsWireless Receiver 226 (not shown). Wireless Transmitter Controller20663OSv is a controller which controls Wireless Transmitter 222 (notshown). Wireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSw is a controller whichcontrols Wireless Transmitter 223 (not shown). Wireless TransmitterController 20663OSx is a controller which controls Wireless Transmitter227 (not shown). For the avoidance of doubt, the data stored inOperating System 20663OS are illustrative, and other types of data,which are updated by implementing the present function, are also storedtherein, such as DLLs, drivers, security implementing program.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in OS UpdatingInformation Storage Area 20663a. In this embodiment, OS UpdatingInformation Storage Area 20663a includes OS Updating Data Storage Area20663b and OS Updating Software Storage Area 20663c. OS Updating DataStorage Area 20663b stores the data necessary to implement the presentfunction on the side of Communication Device 200, such as the onesdescribed hereinafter. OS Updating Software Storage Area 20663c storesthe software programs necessary to implement the present function on theside of Communication Device 200, such as the ones describedhereinafter.

The data and/or the software programs stored in OS Updating SoftwareStorage Area 20663c may be downloaded from Host H.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in OS Updating DataStorage Area 20663b. In this embodiment, OS Updating Data Storage Area20663b includes OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1. OS Version DataStorage Area 20663b1 stores the data described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in OS Version Data StorageArea 20663b1. In this embodiment, OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1includes Battery Controller Version Data 20663b1a, CCD Unit ControllerVersion Data 20663b1b, Flash Light Unit Controller Version Data20663b1c, Indicator Controller Version Data 20663b1d, Input DeviceController Version Data 20663b1e, LCD Controller Version Data 20663b1f,LED Controller Version Data 20663b1g, Memory Card Interface ControllerVersion Data 20663b1h, Microphone Controller Version Data 20663b1i,Photometer Controller Version Data 20663b1j, RAM Controller Version Data20663b1k, ROM Controller Version Data 20663b1l, Signal ProcessorController Version Data 20663b1m, Signal Processor Controller VersionData 20663b1n, Solar Panel Controller Version Data 20663b1o, SpeakerController Version Data 20663b1p, Vibrator Controller Version Data20663b1q, Video Processor Controller Version Data 20663b1r, WirelessReceiver Controller Version Data 20663b1s, Wireless Receiver ControllerVersion Data 20663b1t, Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data20663b1u, Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data 20663b1v,Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data 20663b1w, and WirelessTransmitter Controller Version Data 20663b1x. Battery Controller VersionData 20663b1a is the version data representing the current version ofBattery Controller 20663OSa. CCD Unit Controller Version Data 20663b1bis the version data representing the current version of CCD UnitController 20663OSb. Flash Light Unit Controller Version Data 20663b1cis the version data representing the current version of Flash Light UnitController 20663OSc. Indicator Controller Version Data 20663b1d is theversion data representing the current version of Indicator Controller20663OSd. Input Device Controller Version Data 20663b1e is the versiondata representing the current version of Input Device Controller20663OSe. LCD Controller Version Data 20663b1f is the version datarepresenting the current version of LCD Controller 20663OSf. LEDController Version Data 20663b1g is the version data representing thecurrent version of LED Controller 20663OSg. Memory Card InterfaceController Version Data 20663b1h is the version data representing thecurrent version of Memory Card Interface Controller 20663OSh. MicrophoneController Version Data 20663b1i is the version data representing thecurrent version of Microphone Controller 20663OSi. Photometer ControllerVersion Data 20663b1j is the version data representing the currentversion of Photometer Controller 20663OSj. RAM Controller Version Data20663b1k is the version data representing the current version of RAMController 20663OSk. ROM Controller Version Data 20663b1l is the versiondata representing the current version of ROM Controller 20663OS1. SignalProcessor Controller Version Data 20663b1m is the version datarepresenting the current version of Signal Processor Controller20663OSm. Signal Processor Controller Version Data 20663b1n is theversion data representing the current version of Signal ProcessorController 20663OSn. Solar Panel Controller Version Data 20663b10 is theversion data representing the current version of Solar Panel Controller20663OSo. Speaker Controller Version Data 20663b1p is the version datarepresenting the current version of Speaker Controller 20663OSp.Vibrator Controller Version Data 20663b1q is the version datarepresenting the current version of Vibrator Controller 20663OSq. VideoProcessor Controller Version Data 20663b1r is the version datarepresenting the current version of Video Processor Controller 20663OSr.Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663b1s is the version datarepresenting the current version of Wireless Receiver Controller20663OSs. Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663b1t is theversion data representing the current version of Wireless ReceiverController 20663OSt. Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663b1uis the version data representing the current version of WirelessReceiver Controller 20663OSu. Wireless Transmitter Controller VersionData 20663b1v is the version data representing the current version ofWireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSv. Wireless TransmitterController Version Data 20663b1w is the version data representing thecurrent version of Wireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSw. WirelessTransmitter Controller Version Data 20663b1x is the version datarepresenting the current version of Wireless Transmitter Controller20663OSx. Here, the version data is composed of numeric data, such as‘1’, ‘2’, and ‘3’, wherein ‘1’ represents version ‘1.0’, ‘2’ representsversion ‘2.0’, and ‘3’ represents version ‘3.0’.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in OS UpdatingSoftware Storage Area 20663c. In this embodiment, OS Updating SoftwareStorage Area 20663c stores Battery Controller Updating Software20663c1a, CCD Unit Controller Updating Software 20663c1b, Flash LightUnit Controller Updating Software 20663c1c, Indicator ControllerUpdating Software 20663c1d, Input Device Controller Updating Software20663c1e, LCD Controller Updating Software 20663c1f, LED ControllerUpdating Software 20663c1g, Memory Card Interface Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1h, Microphone Controller Updating Software 20663c1i,Photometer Controller Updating Software 20663c1j, RAM ControllerUpdating Software 20663c1k, ROM Controller Updating Software 20663c1l,Signal Processor Controller Updating Software 20663c1m, Signal ProcessorController Updating Software 20663c1n, Solar Panel Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1o, Speaker Controller Updating Software 20663c1p,Vibrator Controller Updating Software 20663c1q, Video ProcessorController Updating Software 20663c1r, Wireless Receiver ControllerUpdating Software 20663c1s, Wireless Receiver Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1t, Wireless Receiver Controller Updating Software20663c1u, Wireless Transmitter Controller Updating Software 20663c1v,Wireless Transmitter Controller Updating Software 20663c1w, and WirelessTransmitter Controller Updating Software 20663c1x. Battery ControllerUpdating Software 20663c1a is the software program describedhereinafter. CCD Unit Controller Updating Software 20663c1b is thesoftware program described hereinafter. Flash Light Unit ControllerUpdating Software 20663c1c is the software program describedhereinafter. Indicator Controller Updating Software 20663c1d is thesoftware program described hereinafter. Input Device Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1e is the software program described hereinafter. LCDController Updating Software 20663c1f is the software program describedhereinafter. LED Controller Updating Software 20663c1g is the softwareprogram described hereinafter. Memory Card Interface Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1h is the software program described hereinafter.Microphone Controller Updating Software 20663c1i is the software programdescribed hereinafter. Photometer Controller Updating Software 20663c1jis the software program described hereinafter. RAM Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1k is the software program described hereinafter. ROMController Updating Software 20663c1l is the software program describedhereinafter. Signal Processor Controller Updating Software 20663c1m isthe software program described hereinafter. Signal Processor ControllerUpdating Software 20663c1n is the software program describedhereinafter. Solar Panel Controller Updating Software 20663c1o is thesoftware program described hereinafter. Speaker Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1p is the software program described hereinafter.Vibrator Controller Updating Software 20663c1q is the software programdescribed hereinafter. Video Processor Controller Updating Software20663c1r is the software program described hereinafter. WirelessReceiver Controller Updating Software 20663c1s is the software programdescribed hereinafter. Wireless Receiver Controller Updating Software20663c1t is the software program described hereinafter. WirelessReceiver Controller Updating Software 20663c1u is the software programdescribed hereinafter. Wireless Transmitter Controller Updating Software20663c1v is the software program described hereinafter. WirelessTransmitter Controller Updating Software 20663c1w is the softwareprogram described hereinafter. Wireless Transmitter Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1x is the software program described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Host H. In thisembodiment, Host H includes Operating System H63OS of which the datastored therein are described hereinafter, and OS Updating InformationStorage Area H63a of which the data and the software programs storedtherein are described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Operating System H63OS. Inthis embodiment, Operating System H63OS includes Battery ControllerH63OSa, CCD Unit Controller H63OSb, Flash Light Unit Controller H63OSc,Indicator Controller H63OSd, Input Device Controller H63OSe, LCDController H63OSf, LED Controller H63OSg, Memory Card InterfaceController H63OSh, Microphone Controller H63OSi, Photometer ControllerH63OSj, RAM Controller H63OSk, ROM Controller H63OSl, Signal ProcessorController H63OSm, Signal Processor Controller H63OSn, Solar PanelController H63OSo, Speaker Controller H63OSp, Vibrator ControllerH63OSq, Video Processor Controller H63OSr, Wireless Receiver ControllerH63OSs, Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSt, Wireless ReceiverController H63OSu, Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSv, WirelessTransmitter Controller H63OSw, and Wireless Transmitter ControllerH63OSx. Battery Controller H63OSa is the controller of the latestversion which controls Battery 230 (not shown). CCD Unit ControllerH63OSb is the controller of the latest version which controls CCD Unit214 (not shown). Flash Light Unit Controller H63OSc is the controller ofthe latest version which controls Flash Light Unit 220 (not shown).Indicator Controller H63OSd is the controller of the latest versionwhich controls Indicator 212 (not shown). Input Device Controller H63OSeis the controller of the latest version which controls Input Device 210(not shown). LCD Controller H63OSf is the controller of the latestversion which controls LCD 201 (not shown). LED Controller H63OSg is thecontroller of the latest version which controls LED 219 (not shown).Memory Card Interface Controller H63OSh is the controller of the latestversion which controls Memory Card Interface 221 (not shown). MicrophoneController H63OSi is the controller of the latest version which controlsMicrophone 215 (not shown). Photometer Controller H63OSj is thecontroller of the latest version which controls Photometer 232 (notshown). RAM Controller H63OSk is the controller of the latest versionwhich controls Host H (not shown). ROM Controller H63OSl is thecontroller of the latest version which controls ROM 207 (not shown).Signal Processor Controller H63OSm is the controller of the latestversion which controls Signal Processor 205 (not shown). SignalProcessor Controller H63OSn is the controller of the latest versionwhich controls Signal Processor 208 (not shown). Solar Panel ControllerH63OSo is the controller of the latest version which controls SolarPanel 229 (not shown). Speaker Controller H63OSp is the controller ofthe latest version which controls Speaker 216L (not shown). VibratorController H63OSq is the controller of the latest version which controlsVibrator 217 (not shown). Video Processor Controller H63OSr is thecontroller of the latest version which controls Video Processor 202 (notshown). Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSs is the controller of thelatest version which controls Wireless Receiver 224 (not shown).Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSt is the controller of the latestversion which controls Wireless Receiver 225 (not shown). WirelessReceiver Controller H63OSu is the controller of the latest version whichcontrols Wireless Receiver 226 (not shown). Wireless TransmitterController H63OSv is the controller of the latest version which controlsWireless Transmitter 222 (not shown). Wireless Transmitter ControllerH63OSw is the controller of the latest version which controls WirelessTransmitter 223 (not shown). Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSx isthe controller of the latest version which controls Wireless Transmitter227 (not shown). The data stored in Operating System Storage Area H63OSare updated periodically. For the avoidance of doubt, the data stored inOperating System H63OS are illustrative, and other types of data, whichare utilized to update Operating System H63OS of Communication Device200 by implementing the present function, are also stored therein, suchas DLLs, drivers, security implementing program. The data stored inOperating System H63OS are updated periodically thereby the data arealways of the latest version.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in OS UpdatingInformation Storage Area H63a. In this embodiment, OS UpdatingInformation Storage Area H63a includes OS Updating Data Storage AreaH63b and OS Updating Software Storage Area H63c. OS Updating DataStorage Area H63b stores the data necessary to implement the presentfunction on the side of Host H, such as the ones described hereinafter.OS Updating Software Storage Area H63c stores the software programsnecessary to implement the present function on the side of Host H, suchas the ones described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in OS Updating DataStorage Area H63b. In this embodiment, OS Updating Data Storage AreaH63b includes OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1. OS Version DataStorage Area H63b1 stores the data described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in OS Version Data StorageArea H63b1. In this embodiment, OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1includes Battery Controller Version Data H63b1a, CCD Unit ControllerVersion Data H63b1b, Flash Light Unit Controller Version Data H63b1c,Indicator Controller Version Data H63b1d, Input Device ControllerVersion Data H63b1e, LCD Controller Version Data H63b1f, LED ControllerVersion Data H63b1g, Memory Card Interface Controller Version DataH63b1h, Microphone Controller Version Data H63b1i, Photometer ControllerVersion Data H63b1j, RAM Controller Version Data H63b1k, ROM ControllerVersion Data H63b1l, Signal Processor Controller Version Data H63b1m,Signal Processor Controller Version Data H63b1n, Solar Panel ControllerVersion Data H63b1o, Speaker Controller Version Data H63b1p, VibratorController Version Data H63b1q, Video Processor Controller Version DataH63b1r, Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63b1s, WirelessReceiver Controller Version Data H63b1t, Wireless Receiver ControllerVersion Data H63b1u, Wireless Transmitter Controller Version DataH63b1v, Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data H63b1w, andWireless Transmitter Controller Version Data H63b1x. Battery ControllerVersion Data H63b1a is the version data representing the latest versionof Battery Controller H63OSa. CCD Unit Controller Version Data H63b1b isthe version data representing the latest version of CCD Unit ControllerH63OSb. Flash Light Unit Controller Version Data H63b1c is the versiondata representing the latest version of Flash Light Unit ControllerH63OSc. Indicator Controller Version Data H63b1d is the version datarepresenting the latest version of Indicator Controller H63OSd. InputDevice Controller Version Data H63b1e is the version data representingthe latest version of Input Device Controller H63OSe. LCD ControllerVersion Data H63b1f is the version data representing the latest versionof LCD Controller H63OSf. LED Controller Version Data H63b1g is theversion data representing the latest version of LED Controller H63OSg.Memory Card Interface Controller Version Data H63b1h is the version datarepresenting the latest version of Memory Card Interface ControllerH63OSh. Microphone Controller Version Data H63b1i is the version datarepresenting the latest version of Microphone Controller H63OSi.Photometer Controller Version Data H63b1j is the version datarepresenting the latest version of Photometer Controller H63OSj. RAMController Version Data H63b1k is the version data representing thelatest version of RAM Controller H63OSk. ROM Controller Version DataH63b1l is the version data representing the latest version of ROMController H63OSl. Signal Processor Controller Version Data H63b1m isthe version data representing the latest version of Signal ProcessorController H63OSm. Signal Processor Controller Version Data H63b1n isthe version data representing the latest version of Signal ProcessorController H63OSn. Solar Panel Controller Version Data H63b1o is theversion data representing the latest version of Solar Panel ControllerH63OSo. Speaker Controller Version Data H63b1p is the version datarepresenting the latest version of Speaker Controller H63OSp. VibratorController Version Data H63b1q is the version data representing thelatest version of Vibrator Controller H63OSq. Video Processor ControllerVersion Data H63b1r is the version data representing the latest versionof Video Processor Controller H63OSr. Wireless Receiver ControllerVersion Data H63b1s is the version data representing the latest versionof Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSs. Wireless Receiver ControllerVersion Data H63b1t is the version data representing the latest versionof Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSt. Wireless Receiver ControllerVersion Data H63b1u is the version data representing the latest versionof Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSu. Wireless Transmitter ControllerVersion Data H63b1v is the version data representing the latest versionof Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSv. Wireless TransmitterController Version Data H63b1w is the version data representing thelatest version of Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSw. WirelessTransmitter Controller Version Data H63b1x is the version datarepresenting the latest version of Wireless Transmitter ControllerH63OSx. Here, the version data is composed of numeric data, such as ‘1’,‘2’, and ‘3’, wherein ‘1’ represents version ‘1.0’, ‘2’ representsversion ‘2.0’, and ‘3’ represents version ‘3.0’. The data stored in OSVersion Data Storage Area H63b1 are updated periodically.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in OS UpdatingSoftware Storage Area H63c. In this embodiment, OS Updating SoftwareStorage Area H63c stores Battery Controller Updating Software H63c1a,CCD Unit Controller Updating Software H63c1b, Flash Light UnitController Updating Software H63c1c, Indicator Controller UpdatingSoftware H63c1d, Input Device Controller Updating Software H63c1e, LCDController Updating Software H63c1f, LED Controller Updating SoftwareH63c1g, Memory Card Interface Controller Updating Software H63c1h,Microphone Controller Updating Software H63c1i, Photometer ControllerUpdating Software H63c1j, RAM Controller Updating Software H63c1k, ROMController Updating Software H63c1l, Signal Processor ControllerUpdating Software H63c1m, Signal Processor Controller Updating SoftwareH63c1n, Solar Panel Controller Updating Software H63c1o, SpeakerController Updating Software H63c1p, Vibrator Controller UpdatingSoftware H63c1q, Video Processor Controller Updating Software H63c1r,Wireless Receiver Controller Updating Software H63c1s, Wireless ReceiverController Updating Software H63c1t, Wireless Receiver ControllerUpdating Software H63c1u, Wireless Transmitter Controller UpdatingSoftware H63c1v, Wireless Transmitter Controller Updating SoftwareH63c1w, and Wireless Transmitter Controller Updating Software H63c1x.Battery Controller Updating Software H63c1a is the software programdescribed hereinafter. CCD Unit Controller Updating Software H63c1b isthe software program described hereinafter. Flash Light Unit ControllerUpdating Software H63c1c is the software program described hereinafter.Indicator Controller Updating Software H63c1d is the software programdescribed hereinafter. Input Device Controller Updating Software H63c1eis the software program described hereinafter. LCD Controller UpdatingSoftware H63c1f is the software program described hereinafter. LEDController Updating Software H63c1g is the software program describedhereinafter. Memory Card Interface Controller Updating Software H63c1his the software program described hereinafter. Microphone ControllerUpdating Software H63c1i is the software program described hereinafter.Photometer Controller Updating Software H63c1j is the software programdescribed hereinafter. RAM Controller Updating Software H63c1k is thesoftware program described hereinafter. ROM Controller Updating SoftwareH63c1l is the software program described hereinafter. Signal ProcessorController Updating Software H63c1m is the software program describedhereinafter. Signal Processor Controller Updating Software H63c1n is thesoftware program described hereinafter. Solar Panel Controller UpdatingSoftware H63c1o is the software program described hereinafter. SpeakerController Updating Software H63c1p is the software program describedhereinafter. Vibrator Controller Updating Software H63c1q is thesoftware program described hereinafter. Video Processor ControllerUpdating Software H63c1r is the software program described hereinafter.Wireless Receiver Controller Updating Software H63c1s is the softwareprogram described hereinafter. Wireless Receiver Controller UpdatingSoftware H63c1t is the software program described hereinafter. WirelessReceiver Controller Updating Software H63c1u is the software programdescribed hereinafter. Wireless Transmitter Controller Updating SoftwareH63c1v is the software program described hereinafter. WirelessTransmitter Controller Updating Software H63c1w is the software programdescribed hereinafter. Wireless Transmitter Controller Updating SoftwareH63c1x is the software program described hereinafter. The foregoingsoftware programs are automatically implemented periodically orimplemented manually by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system.

This paragraph illustrates Battery Controller Updating Software H63c1aof Host H and Battery Controller Updating Software 20663c1a ofCommunication Device 200, which update Battery Controller 20663OSastored in Operating System 20663OS of Communication Device 200. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrievesBattery Controller Version Data 20663b1a from OS Version Data StorageArea 20663b1 and sends the data to Host H (S1). Upon receiving BatteryController Version Data 20663b1a from Communication Device 200 (S2),Host H compares Battery Controller Version Data 20663b1a with BatteryController Version Data H63b1a stored in OS Version Data Storage AreaH63b1 of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host H detects in S3 that BatteryController Version Data 20663b1a of Communication Device 200 is of anold version. Host H retrieves Battery Controller H63OSa, which is of thelatest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS, and sends thecontroller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Upon receiving BatteryController H63OSa from Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores Battery ControllerH63OSa as Battery Controller 20663OSa in Operating System 20663OS (S6).The old version of Battery Controller 20663OSa is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates another embodiment of Battery ControllerUpdating Software H63c1a of Host H and Battery Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1a of Communication Device 200, which update BatteryController 20663OSa stored in Operating System 20663OS of CommunicationDevice 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device200 sends a Battery Controller Update Request, which is received by HostH (S1). Here, the Battery Controller Update Request is a request to sendBattery Controller Version Data H63b1a stored in Host H to CommunicationDevice 200. In response to the request, Host H retrieves BatteryController Version Data H63b1a from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1,and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2). Upon receivingBattery Controller Version Data H63b1a from Host H (S3), CPU 211compares Battery Controller Version Data H63b1a with Battery ControllerVersion Data 20663b1a stored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1 ofCommunication Device 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU 211 detects in S4 thatBattery Controller Version Data 20663b1a of Communication Device 200 isof an old version. CPU 211 sends a New Battery Controller SendingRequest, which is received by Host H (S5). Here, the New BatteryController Sending Request is a request to send Battery ControllerH63OSa stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Host H retrievesBattery Controller H63OSa, which is of the latest version, fromOperating System Storage Area H63OS, and sends the controller toCommunication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving Battery Controller H63OSafrom Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores Battery Controller H63OSa as BatteryController 20663OSa in Operating System 20663OS (S8). The old version ofBattery Controller 20663OSa is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates CCD Unit Controller Updating Software H63c1bof Host H and CCD Unit Controller Updating Software 20663c1b ofCommunication Device 200, which update CCD Unit Controller 20663OSbstored in Operating System 20663OS of Communication Device 200. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrieves CCDUnit Controller Version Data 20663b1b from OS Version Data Storage Area20663b1 and sends the data to Host H (S1). Upon receiving CCD UnitController Version Data 20663b1b from Communication Device 200 (S2),Host H compares CCD Unit Controller Version Data 20663b1b with CCD UnitController Version Data H63b1b stored in OS Version Data Storage AreaH63b1 of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host H detects in S3 that CCD UnitController Version Data 20663b1b of Communication Device 200 is of anold version. Host H retrieves CCD Unit Controller H63OSb, which is ofthe latest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS, and sendsthe controller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Upon receiving CCD UnitController H63OSb from Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores CCD Unit ControllerH63OSb as CCD Unit Controller 20663OSb in Operating System 20663OS (S6).The old version of CCD Unit Controller 20663OSb is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates another embodiment of CCD Unit ControllerUpdating Software H63c1b of Host H and CCD Unit Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1b of Communication Device 200, which update CCD UnitController 20663OSb stored in Operating System 20663OS of CommunicationDevice 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device200 sends a CCD Unit Controller Update Request, which is received byHost H (S1). Here, the CCD Unit Controller Update Request is a requestto send CCD Unit Controller Version Data H63b1b stored in Host H toCommunication Device 200. In response to the request, Host H retrievesCCD Unit Controller Version Data H63b1b from OS Version Data StorageArea H63b1, and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2). Uponreceiving CCD Unit Controller Version Data H63b1b from Host H (S3), CPU211 compares CCD Unit Controller Version Data H63b1b with CCD UnitController Version Data 20663b1b stored in OS Version Data Storage Area20663b1 of Communication Device 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU 211 detectsin S4 that CCD Unit Controller Version Data 20663b1b of CommunicationDevice 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sends a New CCD Unit ControllerSending Request, which is received by Host H (S5). Here, the New CCDUnit Controller Sending Request is a request to send CCD Unit ControllerH63OSb stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Host H retrievesCCD Unit Controller H63OSb, which is of the latest version, fromOperating System Storage Area H63OS, and sends the controller toCommunication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving CCD Unit Controller H63OSbfrom Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores CCD Unit Controller H63OSb as CCD UnitController 20663OSb in Operating System 20663OS (S8). The old version ofCCD Unit Controller 20663OSb is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates Flash Light Unit Controller Updating SoftwareH63c1c of Host H and Flash Light Unit Controller Updating Software20663c1c of Communication Device 200, which update Flash Light UnitController 20663OSc stored in Operating System 20663OS of CommunicationDevice 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device200 retrieves Flash Light Unit Controller Version Data 20663b1c from OSVersion Data Storage Area 20663b1 and sends the data to Host H (S1).Upon receiving Flash Light Unit Controller Version Data 20663b1c fromCommunication Device 200 (S2), Host H compares Flash Light UnitController Version Data 20663b1c with Flash Light Unit ControllerVersion Data H63b1c stored in OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 of HostH (S3). Assuming that Host H detects in S3 that Flash Light UnitController Version Data 20663b1c of Communication Device 200 is of anold version. Host H retrieves Flash Light Unit Controller H63OSc, whichis of the latest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS, andsends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Upon receivingFlash Light Unit Controller H63OSc from Host H (S5), CPU 211 storesFlash Light Unit Controller H63OSc as Flash Light Unit Controller20663OSc in Operating System 20663OS (S6). The old version of FlashLight Unit Controller 20663OSc is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates another embodiment of Flash Light UnitController Updating Software H63c1c of Host H and Flash Light UnitController Updating Software 20663c1c of Communication Device 200, whichupdate Flash Light Unit Controller 20663OSc stored in Operating System20663OS of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a Flash Light Unit ControllerUpdate Request, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, the Flash LightUnit Controller Update Request is a request to send Flash Light UnitController Version Data H63b1c stored in Host H to Communication Device200. In response to the request, Host H retrieves Flash Light UnitController Version Data H63b1c from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1,and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2). Upon receivingFlash Light Unit Controller Version Data H63b1c from Host H (S3), CPU211 compares Flash Light Unit Controller Version Data H63b1c with FlashLight Unit Controller Version Data 20663b1c stored in OS Version DataStorage Area 20663b1 of Communication Device 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 that Flash Light Unit Controller Version Data 20663b1cof Communication Device 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sends a NewFlash Light Unit Controller Sending Request, which is received by Host H(S5). Here, the New Flash Light Unit Controller Sending Request is arequest to send Flash Light Unit Controller H63OSc stored in Host H toCommunication Device 200. Host H retrieves Flash Light Unit ControllerH63OSc, which is of the latest version, from Operating System StorageArea H63OS, and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S6).Upon receiving Flash Light Unit Controller H63OSc from Host H (S7), CPU211 stores Flash Light Unit Controller H63OSc as Flash Light UnitController 20663OSc in Operating System 20663OS (S8). The old version ofFlash Light Unit Controller 20663OSc is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates Indicator Controller Updating Software H63c1dof Host H and Indicator Controller Updating Software 20663c1d ofCommunication Device 200, which update Indicator Controller 20663OSdstored in Operating System 20663OS of Communication Device 200. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrievesIndicator Controller Version Data 20663b1d from OS Version Data StorageArea 20663b1 and sends the data to Host H (S1). Upon receiving IndicatorController Version Data 20663b1d from Communication Device 200 (S2),Host H compares Indicator Controller Version Data 20663b1d withIndicator Controller Version Data H63b1d stored in OS Version DataStorage Area H63b1 of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host H detects in S3that Indicator Controller Version Data 20663b1d of Communication Device200 is of an old version. Host H retrieves Indicator Controller H63OSd,which is of the latest version, from Operating System Storage AreaH63OS, and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Uponreceiving Indicator Controller H63OSd from Host H (S5), CPU 211 storesIndicator Controller H63OSd as Indicator Controller 20663OSd inOperating System 20663OS (S6). The old version of Indicator Controller20663OSd is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates another embodiment of Indicator ControllerUpdating Software H63c1d of Host H and Indicator Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1d of Communication Device 200, which update IndicatorController 20663OSd stored in Operating System 20663OS of CommunicationDevice 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device200 sends a Indicator Controller Update Request, which is received byHost H (S1). Here, the Indicator Controller Update Request is a requestto send Indicator Controller Version Data H63b1d stored in Host H toCommunication Device 200. In response to the request, Host H retrievesIndicator Controller Version Data H63b1d from OS Version Data StorageArea H63b1, and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2). Uponreceiving Indicator Controller Version Data H63b1d from Host H (S3), CPU211 compares Indicator Controller Version Data H63b1d with IndicatorController Version Data 20663b1d stored in OS Version Data Storage Area20663b1 of Communication Device 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU 211 detectsin S4 that Indicator Controller Version Data 20663b1d of CommunicationDevice 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sends a New IndicatorController Sending Request, which is received by Host H (S5). Here, theNew Indicator Controller Sending Request is a request to send IndicatorController H63OSd stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Host Hretrieves Indicator Controller H63OSd, which is of the latest version,from Operating System Storage Area H63OS, and sends the controller toCommunication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving Indicator ControllerH63OSd from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores Indicator Controller H63OSd asIndicator Controller 20663OSd in Operating System 20663OS (S8). The oldversion of Indicator Controller 20663OSd is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates Input Device Controller Updating SoftwareH63c1e of Host H and Input Device Controller Updating Software 20663c1eof Communication Device 200, which update Input Device Controller20663OSe stored in Operating System 20663OS of Communication Device 200.In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200retrieves Input Device Controller Version Data 20663b1e from OS VersionData Storage Area 20663b1 and sends the data to Host H (S1). Uponreceiving Input Device Controller Version Data 20663b1e fromCommunication Device 200 (S2), Host H compares Input Device ControllerVersion Data 20663b1e with Input Device Controller Version Data H63b1estored in OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 of Host H (S3). Assumingthat Host H detects in S3 that Input Device Controller Version Data20663b1e of Communication Device 200 is of an old version. Host Hretrieves Input Device Controller H63OSe, which is of the latestversion, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS, and sends thecontroller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Upon receiving Input DeviceController H63OSe from Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores Input DeviceController H63OSe as Input Device Controller 20663OSe in OperatingSystem 20663OS (S6). The old version of Input Device Controller 20663OSeis deleted.

This paragraph illustrates another embodiment of Input Device ControllerUpdating Software H63c1e of Host H and Input Device Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1e of Communication Device 200, which update Input DeviceController 20663OSe stored in Operating System 20663OS of CommunicationDevice 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device200 sends a Input Device Controller Update Request, which is received byHost H (S1). Here, the Input Device Controller Update Request is arequest to send Input Device Controller Version Data H63b1e stored inHost H to Communication Device 200. In response to the request, Host Hretrieves Input Device Controller Version Data H63b1e from OS VersionData Storage Area H63b1, and sends the data to Communication Device 200(S2). Upon receiving Input Device Controller Version Data H63b1e fromHost H (S3), CPU 211 compares Input Device Controller Version DataH63b1e with Input Device Controller Version Data 20663b1e stored in OSVersion Data Storage Area 20663b1 of Communication Device 200 (S4).Assuming that CPU 211 detects in S4 that Input Device Controller VersionData 20663b1e of Communication Device 200 is of an old version. CPU 211sends a New Input Device Controller Sending Request, which is receivedby Host H (S5). Here, the New Input Device Controller Sending Request isa request to send Input Device Controller H63OSe stored in Host H toCommunication Device 200. Host H retrieves Input Device ControllerH63OSe, which is of the latest version, from Operating System StorageArea H63OS, and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S6).Upon receiving Input Device Controller H63OSe from Host H (S7), CPU 211stores Input Device Controller H63OSe as Input Device Controller20663OSe in Operating System 20663OS (S8). The old version of InputDevice Controller 20663OSe is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates LCD Controller Updating Software H63c1f ofHost H and LCD Controller Updating Software 20663c1f of CommunicationDevice 200, which update LCD Controller 20663OSf stored in OperatingSystem 20663OS of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrieves LCD Controller VersionData 20663b1f from OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1 and sends thedata to Host H (S1). Upon receiving LCD Controller Version Data 20663b1ffrom Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H compares LCD ControllerVersion Data 20663b1f with LCD Controller Version Data H63b1f stored inOS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host Hdetects in S3 that LCD Controller Version Data 20663b1f of CommunicationDevice 200 is of an old version. Host H retrieves LCD Controller H63OSf,which is of the latest version, from Operating System Storage AreaH63OS, and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Uponreceiving LCD Controller H63OSf from Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores LCDController H63OSf as LCD Controller 20663OSf in Operating System 20663OS(S6). The old version of LCD Controller 20663OSf is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates another embodiment of LCD Controller UpdatingSoftware H63c1f of Host H and LCD Controller Updating Software 20663c1fof Communication Device 200, which update LCD Controller 20663OSf storedin Operating System 20663OS of Communication Device 200. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a LCDController Update Request, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, theLCD Controller Update Request is a request to send LCD ControllerVersion Data H63b1f stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Inresponse to the request, Host H retrieves LCD Controller Version DataH63b1f from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1, and sends the data toCommunication Device 200 (S2). Upon receiving LCD Controller VersionData H63b1f from Host H (S3), CPU 211 compares LCD Controller VersionData H63b1f with LCD Controller Version Data 20663b1f stored in OSVersion Data Storage Area 20663b1 of Communication Device 200 (S4).Assuming that CPU 211 detects in S4 that LCD Controller Version Data20663b1f of Communication Device 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sendsa New LCD Controller Sending Request, which is received by Host H (S5).Here, the New LCD Controller Sending Request is a request to send LCDController H63OSf stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Host Hretrieves LCD Controller H63OSf, which is of the latest version, fromOperating System Storage Area H63OS, and sends the controller toCommunication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving LCD Controller H63OSf fromHost H (S7), CPU 211 stores LCD Controller H63OSf as LCD Controller20663OSf in Operating System 20663OS (S8). The old version of LCDController 20663OSf is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates LED Controller Updating Software H63c1g ofHost H and LED Controller Updating Software 20663c1g of CommunicationDevice 200, which update LED Controller 20663OSg stored in OperatingSystem 20663OS of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrieves LED Controller VersionData 20663b1g from OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1 and sends thedata to Host H (S1). Upon receiving LED Controller Version Data 20663b1gfrom Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H compares LED ControllerVersion Data 20663b1g with LED Controller Version Data H63b1g stored inOS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host Hdetects in S3 that LED Controller Version Data 20663b1g of CommunicationDevice 200 is of an old version. Host H retrieves LED Controller H63OSg,which is of the latest version, from Operating System Storage AreaH63OS, and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Uponreceiving LED Controller H63OSg from Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores LEDController H63OSg as LED Controller 20663OSg in Operating System 20663OS(S6). The old version of LED Controller 20663OSg is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates another embodiment of LED Controller UpdatingSoftware H63c1g of Host H and LED Controller Updating Software 20663c1gof Communication Device 200, which update LED Controller 20663OSg storedin Operating System 20663OS of Communication Device 200. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a LEDController Update Request, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, theLED Controller Update Request is a request to send LED ControllerVersion Data H63b1g stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Inresponse to the request, Host H retrieves LED Controller Version DataH63b1g from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1, and sends the data toCommunication Device 200 (S2). Upon receiving LED Controller VersionData H63b1g from Host H (S3), CPU 211 compares LED Controller VersionData H63b1g with LED Controller Version Data 20663b1g stored in OSVersion Data Storage Area 20663b1 of Communication Device 200 (S4).Assuming that CPU 211 detects in S4 that LED Controller Version Data20663b1g of Communication Device 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sendsa New LED Controller Sending Request, which is received by Host H (S5).Here, the New LED Controller Sending Request is a request to send LEDController H63OSg stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Host Hretrieves LED Controller H63OSg, which is of the latest version, fromOperating System Storage Area H63OS, and sends the controller toCommunication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving LED Controller H63OSg fromHost H (S7), CPU 211 stores LED Controller H63OSg as LED Controller20663OSg in Operating System 20663OS (S8). The old version of LEDController 20663OSg is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates Memory Card Interface Controller UpdatingSoftware H63c1h of Host H and Memory Card Interface Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1h of Communication Device 200, which update Memory CardInterface Controller 20663OSh stored in Operating System 20663OS ofCommunication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 retrieves Memory Card Interface ControllerVersion Data 20663b1h from OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1 andsends the data to Host H (S1). Upon receiving Memory Card InterfaceController Version Data 20663b1h from Communication Device 200 (S2),Host H compares Memory Card Interface Controller Version Data 20663b1hwith Memory Card Interface Controller Version Data H63b1h stored in OSVersion Data Storage Area H63b1 of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host Hdetects in S3 that Memory Card Interface Controller Version Data20663b1h of Communication Device 200 is of an old version. Host Hretrieves Memory Card Interface Controller H63OSh, which is of thelatest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS, and sends thecontroller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Upon receiving Memory CardInterface Controller H63OSh from Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores Memory CardInterface Controller H63OSh as Memory Card Interface Controller 20663OShin Operating System 20663OS (S6). The old version of Memory CardInterface Controller 20663OSh is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates another embodiment of Memory Card InterfaceController Updating Software H63c1h of Host H and Memory Card InterfaceController Updating Software 20663c1h of Communication Device 200, whichupdate Memory Card Interface Controller 20663OSh stored in OperatingSystem 20663OS of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a Memory Card InterfaceController Update Request, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, theMemory Card Interface Controller Update Request is a request to sendMemory Card Interface Controller Version Data H63b1h stored in Host H toCommunication Device 200. In response to the request, Host H retrievesMemory Card Interface Controller Version Data H63b1h from OS VersionData Storage Area H63b1, and sends the data to Communication Device 200(S2). Upon receiving Memory Card Interface Controller Version DataH63b1h from Host H (S3), CPU 211 compares Memory Card InterfaceController Version Data H63b1h with Memory Card Interface ControllerVersion Data 20663b1h stored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1 ofCommunication Device 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU 211 detects in S4 thatMemory Card Interface Controller Version Data 20663b1h of CommunicationDevice 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sends a New Memory CardInterface Controller Sending Request, which is received by Host H (S5).Here, the New Memory Card Interface Controller Sending Request is arequest to send Memory Card Interface Controller H63OSh stored in Host Hto Communication Device 200. Host H retrieves Memory Card InterfaceController H63OSh, which is of the latest version, from Operating SystemStorage Area H63OS, and sends the controller to Communication Device 200(S6). Upon receiving Memory Card Interface Controller H63OSh from Host H(S7), CPU 211 stores Memory Card Interface Controller H63OSh as MemoryCard Interface Controller 20663OSh in Operating System 20663OS (S8). Theold version of Memory Card Interface Controller 20663OSh is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates Microphone Controller Updating SoftwareH63c1i of Host H and Microphone Controller Updating Software 20663c1i ofCommunication Device 200, which update Microphone Controller 20663OSistored in Operating System 20663OS of Communication Device 200. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrievesMicrophone Controller Version Data 20663b1i from OS Version Data StorageArea 20663b1 and sends the data to Host H (S1). Upon receivingMicrophone Controller Version Data 20663b1i from Communication Device200 (S2), Host H compares Microphone Controller Version Data 20663b1iwith Microphone Controller Version Data H63b1i stored in OS Version DataStorage Area H63b1 of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host H detects in S3that Microphone Controller Version Data 20663b1i of Communication Device200 is of an old version. Host H retrieves Microphone Controller H63OSi,which is of the latest version, from Operating System Storage AreaH63OS, and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Uponreceiving Microphone Controller H63OSi from Host H (S5), CPU 211 storesMicrophone Controller H63OSi as Microphone Controller 20663OSi inOperating System 20663OS (S6). The old version of Microphone Controller20663OSi is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates another embodiment of Microphone ControllerUpdating Software H63c1i of Host H and Microphone Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1i of Communication Device 200, which update MicrophoneController 20663OSi stored in Operating System 20663OS of CommunicationDevice 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device200 sends a Microphone Controller Update Request, which is received byHost H (S1). Here, the Microphone Controller Update Request is a requestto send Microphone Controller Version Data H63b1i stored in Host H toCommunication Device 200. In response to the request, Host H retrievesMicrophone Controller Version Data H63b1i from OS Version Data StorageArea H63b1, and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2). Uponreceiving Microphone Controller Version Data H63b1i from Host H (S3),CPU 211 compares Microphone Controller Version Data H63b1i withMicrophone Controller Version Data 20663b1i stored in OS Version DataStorage Area 20663b1 of Communication Device 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 that Microphone Controller Version Data 20663b1i ofCommunication Device 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sends a NewMicrophone Controller Sending Request, which is received by Host H (S5).Here, the New Microphone Controller Sending Request is a request to sendMicrophone Controller H63OSi stored in Host H to Communication Device200. Host H retrieves Microphone Controller H63OSi, which is of thelatest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS, and sends thecontroller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving MicrophoneController H63OSi from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores Microphone ControllerH63OSi as Microphone Controller 20663OSi in Operating System 20663OS(S8). The old version of Microphone Controller 20663OSi is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates Photometer Controller Updating SoftwareH63c1j of Host H and Photometer Controller Updating Software 20663c1j ofCommunication Device 200, which update Photometer Controller 20663OSjstored in Operating System 20663OS of Communication Device 200. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrievesPhotometer Controller Version Data 20663b1j from OS Version Data StorageArea 20663b1 and sends the data to Host H (S1). Upon receivingPhotometer Controller Version Data 20663b1j from Communication Device200 (S2), Host H compares Photometer Controller Version Data 20663b1jwith Photometer Controller Version Data H63b1j stored in OS Version DataStorage Area H63b1 of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host H detects in S3that Photometer Controller Version Data 20663b1j of Communication Device200 is of an old version. Host H retrieves Photometer Controller H63OSj,which is of the latest version, from Operating System Storage AreaH63OS, and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Uponreceiving Photometer Controller H63OSj from Host H (S5), CPU 211 storesPhotometer Controller H63OSj as Photometer Controller 20663OSj inOperating System 20663OS (S6). The old version of Photometer Controller20663OSj is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates another embodiment of Photometer ControllerUpdating Software H63c1j of Host H and Photometer Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1j of Communication Device 200, which update PhotometerController 20663OSj stored in Operating System 20663OS of CommunicationDevice 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device200 sends a Photometer Controller Update Request, which is received byHost H (S1). Here, the Photometer Controller Update Request is a requestto send Photometer Controller Version Data H63b1j stored in Host H toCommunication Device 200. In response to the request, Host H retrievesPhotometer Controller Version Data H63b1j from OS Version Data StorageArea H63b1, and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2). Uponreceiving Photometer Controller Version Data H63b1j from Host H (S3),CPU 211 compares Photometer Controller Version Data H63b1j withPhotometer Controller Version Data 20663b1j stored in OS Version DataStorage Area 20663b1 of Communication Device 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 that Photometer Controller Version Data 20663b1j ofCommunication Device 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sends a NewPhotometer Controller Sending Request, which is received by Host H (S5).Here, the New Photometer Controller Sending Request is a request to sendPhotometer Controller H63OSj stored in Host H to Communication Device200. Host H retrieves Photometer Controller H63OSj, which is of thelatest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS, and sends thecontroller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving PhotometerController H63OSj from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores Photometer ControllerH63OSj as Photometer Controller 20663OSj in Operating System 20663OS(S8). The old version of Photometer Controller 20663OSj is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates RAM Controller Updating Software H63c1k ofHost H and RAM Controller Updating Software 20663c1k of CommunicationDevice 200, which update RAM Controller 20663OSk stored in OperatingSystem 20663OS of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrieves RAM Controller VersionData 20663b1k from OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1 and sends thedata to Host H (S1). Upon receiving RAM Controller Version Data 20663b1kfrom Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H compares RAM ControllerVersion Data 20663b1k with RAM Controller Version Data H63b1k stored inOS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host Hdetects in S3 that RAM Controller Version Data 20663b1k of CommunicationDevice 200 is of an old version. Host H retrieves RAM Controller H63OSk,which is of the latest version, from Operating System Storage AreaH63OS, and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Uponreceiving RAM Controller H63OSk from Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores RAMController H63OSk as RAM Controller 20663OSk in Operating System 20663OS(S6). The old version of RAM Controller 20663OSk is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates another embodiment of RAM Controller UpdatingSoftware H63c1k of Host H and RAM Controller Updating Software 20663c1kof Communication Device 200, which update RAM Controller 20663OSk storedin Operating System 20663OS of Communication Device 200. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a RAMController Update Request, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, theRAM Controller Update Request is a request to send RAM ControllerVersion Data H63b1k stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Inresponse to the request, Host H retrieves RAM Controller Version DataH63b1k from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1, and sends the data toCommunication Device 200 (S2). Upon receiving RAM Controller VersionData H63b1k from Host H (S3), CPU 211 compares RAM Controller VersionData H63b1k with RAM Controller Version Data 20663b1k stored in OSVersion Data Storage Area 20663b1 of Communication Device 200 (S4).Assuming that CPU 211 detects in S4 that RAM Controller Version Data20663b1k of Communication Device 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sendsa New RAM Controller Sending Request, which is received by Host H (S5).Here, the New RAM Controller Sending Request is a request to send RAMController H63OSk stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Host Hretrieves RAM Controller H63OSk, which is of the latest version, fromOperating System Storage Area H63OS, and sends the controller toCommunication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving RAM Controller H63OSk fromHost H (S7), CPU 211 stores RAM Controller H63OSk as RAM Controller20663OSk in Operating System 20663OS (S8). The old version of RAMController 20663OSk is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates ROM Controller Updating Software H63c1l ofHost H and ROM Controller Updating Software 20663c1l of CommunicationDevice 200, which update ROM Controller 20663OSl stored in OperatingSystem 20663OS of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrieves ROM Controller VersionData 20663b1l from OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1 and sends thedata to Host H (S1). Upon receiving ROM Controller Version Data 20663b1lfrom Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H compares ROM ControllerVersion Data 20663b1l with ROM Controller Version Data H63b1l stored inOS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host Hdetects in S3 that ROM Controller Version Data 20663b1l of CommunicationDevice 200 is of an old version. Host H retrieves ROM Controller H63OSl,which is of the latest version, from Operating System Storage AreaH63OS, and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Uponreceiving ROM Controller H63OSl from Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores ROMController H63OSl as ROM Controller 20663OSl in Operating System 20663OS(S6). The old version of ROM Controller 20663OSl is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates another embodiment of ROM Controller UpdatingSoftware H63c1l of Host H and ROM Controller Updating Software 20663c1lof Communication Device 200, which update ROM Controller 20663OSl storedin Operating System 20663OS of Communication Device 200. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a ROMController Update Request, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, theROM Controller Update Request is a request to send ROM ControllerVersion Data H63b1l stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Inresponse to the request, Host H retrieves ROM Controller Version DataH63b1l from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1, and sends the data toCommunication Device 200 (S2). Upon receiving ROM Controller VersionData H63b1l from Host H (S3), CPU 211 compares ROM Controller VersionData H63b1l with ROM Controller Version Data 20663b1l stored in OSVersion Data Storage Area 20663b1 of Communication Device 200 (S4).Assuming that CPU 211 detects in S4 that ROM Controller Version Data20663b1l of Communication Device 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sendsa New ROM Controller Sending Request, which is received by Host H (S5).Here, the New ROM Controller Sending Request is a request to send ROMController H63OSl stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Host Hretrieves ROM Controller H63OSl, which is of the latest version, fromOperating System Storage Area H63OS, and sends the controller toCommunication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving ROM Controller H63OSl fromHost H (S7), CPU 211 stores ROM Controller H63OSl as ROM Controller20663OSl in Operating System 20663OS (S8). The old version of ROMController 20663OSl is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates Signal Processor Controller Updating SoftwareH63c1m of Host H and Signal Processor Controller Updating Software20663c1m of Communication Device 200, which update Signal ProcessorController 20663OSm stored in Operating System 20663OS of CommunicationDevice 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device200 retrieves Signal Processor Controller Version Data 20663b1m from OSVersion Data Storage Area 20663b1 and sends the data to Host H (S1).Upon receiving Signal Processor Controller Version Data 20663b1m fromCommunication Device 200 (S2), Host H compares Signal ProcessorController Version Data 20663b1m with Signal Processor ControllerVersion Data H63b1m stored in OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 of HostH (S3). Assuming that Host H detects in S3 that Signal ProcessorController Version Data 20663b1m of Communication Device 200 is of anold version. Host H retrieves Signal Processor Controller H63OSm, whichis of the latest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS, andsends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Upon receivingSignal Processor Controller H63OSm from Host H (S5), CPU 211 storesSignal Processor Controller H63OSm as Signal Processor Controller20663OSm in Operating System 20663OS (S6). The old version of SignalProcessor Controller 20663OSm is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates another embodiment of Signal ProcessorController Updating Software H63c1m of Host H and Signal ProcessorController Updating Software 20663c1m of Communication Device 200, whichupdate Signal Processor Controller 20663OSm stored in Operating System20663OS of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a Signal Processor ControllerUpdate Request, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, the SignalProcessor Controller Update Request is a request to send SignalProcessor Controller Version Data H63b1m stored in Host H toCommunication Device 200. In response to the request, Host H retrievesSignal Processor Controller Version Data H63b1m from OS Version DataStorage Area H63b1, and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2).Upon receiving Signal Processor Controller Version Data H63b1m from HostH (S3), CPU 211 compares Signal Processor Controller Version Data H63b1mwith Signal Processor Controller Version Data 20663b1m stored in OSVersion Data Storage Area 20663b1 of Communication Device 200 (S4).Assuming that CPU 211 detects in S4 that Signal Processor ControllerVersion Data 20663b1m of Communication Device 200 is of an old version.CPU 211 sends a New Signal Processor Controller Sending Request, whichis received by Host H (S5). Here, the New Signal Processor ControllerSending Request is a request to send Signal Processor Controller H63OSmstored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Host H retrieves SignalProcessor Controller H63OSm, which is of the latest version, fromOperating System Storage Area H63OS, and sends the controller toCommunication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving Signal ProcessorController H63OSm from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores Signal ProcessorController H63OSm as Signal Processor Controller 20663OSm in OperatingSystem 20663OS (S8). The old version of Signal Processor Controller20663OSm is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates Signal Processor Controller Updating SoftwareH63c1n of Host H and Signal Processor Controller Updating Software20663c1n of Communication Device 200, which update Signal ProcessorController 20663OSn stored in Operating System 20663OS of CommunicationDevice 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device200 retrieves Signal Processor Controller Version Data 20663b1n from OSVersion Data Storage Area 20663b1 and sends the data to Host H (S1).Upon receiving Signal Processor Controller Version Data 20663b1n fromCommunication Device 200 (S2), Host H compares Signal ProcessorController Version Data 20663b1n with Signal Processor ControllerVersion Data H63b1n stored in OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 of HostH (S3). Assuming that Host H detects in S3 that Signal ProcessorController Version Data 20663b1n of Communication Device 200 is of anold version. Host H retrieves Signal Processor Controller H63OSn, whichis of the latest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS, andsends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Upon receivingSignal Processor Controller H63OSn from Host H (S5), CPU 211 storesSignal Processor Controller H63OSn as Signal Processor Controller20663OSn in Operating System 20663OS (S6). The old version of SignalProcessor Controller 20663OSn is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates another embodiment of Signal ProcessorController Updating Software H63c1n of Host H and Signal ProcessorController Updating Software 20663c1n of Communication Device 200, whichupdate Signal Processor Controller 20663OSn stored in Operating System20663OS of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a Signal Processor ControllerUpdate Request, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, the SignalProcessor Controller Update Request is a request to send SignalProcessor Controller Version Data H63b1n stored in Host H toCommunication Device 200. In response to the request, Host H retrievesSignal Processor Controller Version Data H63b1n from OS Version DataStorage Area H63b1, and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2).Upon receiving Signal Processor Controller Version Data H63b1n from HostH (S3), CPU 211 compares Signal Processor Controller Version Data H63b1nwith Signal Processor Controller Version Data 20663b1n stored in OSVersion Data Storage Area 20663b1 of Communication Device 200 (S4).Assuming that CPU 211 detects in S4 that Signal Processor ControllerVersion Data 20663b1n of Communication Device 200 is of an old version.CPU 211 sends a New Signal Processor Controller Sending Request, whichis received by Host H (S5). Here, the New Signal Processor ControllerSending Request is a request to send Signal Processor Controller H63OSnstored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Host H retrieves SignalProcessor Controller H63OSn, which is of the latest version, fromOperating System Storage Area H63OS, and sends the controller toCommunication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving Signal ProcessorController H63OSn from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores Signal ProcessorController H63OSn as Signal Processor Controller 20663OSn in OperatingSystem 20663OS (S8). The old version of Signal Processor Controller20663OSn is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates Solar Panel Controller Updating SoftwareH63c1o of Host H and Solar Panel Controller Updating Software 20663c1oof Communication Device 200, which update Solar Panel Controller20663OSo stored in Operating System 20663OS of Communication Device 200.In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200retrieves Solar Panel Controller Version Data 20663b10 from OS VersionData Storage Area 20663b1 and sends the data to Host H (S1). Uponreceiving Solar Panel Controller Version Data 20663b10 fromCommunication Device 200 (S2), Host H compares Solar Panel ControllerVersion Data 20663b10 with Solar Panel Controller Version Data H63b1ostored in OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 of Host H (S3). Assumingthat Host H detects in S3 that Solar Panel Controller Version Data20663b10 of Communication Device 200 is of an old version. Host Hretrieves Solar Panel Controller H63OSo, which is of the latest version,from Operating System Storage Area H63OS, and sends the controller toCommunication Device 200 (S4). Upon receiving Solar Panel ControllerH63OSo from Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores Solar Panel Controller H63OSo asSolar Panel Controller 20663OSo in Operating System 20663OS (S6). Theold version of Solar Panel Controller 20663OSo is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates another embodiment of Solar Panel ControllerUpdating Software H63c1o of Host H and Solar Panel Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1o of Communication Device 200, which update Solar PanelController 20663OSo stored in Operating System 20663OS of CommunicationDevice 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device200 sends a Solar Panel Controller Update Request, which is received byHost H (S1). Here, the Solar Panel Controller Update Request is arequest to send Solar Panel Controller Version Data H63b1o stored inHost H to Communication Device 200. In response to the request, Host Hretrieves Solar Panel Controller Version Data H63b1o from OS VersionData Storage Area H63b1, and sends the data to Communication Device 200(S2). Upon receiving Solar Panel Controller Version Data H63b1o fromHost H (S3), CPU 211 compares Solar Panel Controller Version Data H63b1owith Solar Panel Controller Version Data 20663b10 stored in OS VersionData Storage Area 20663b1 of Communication Device 200 (S4). Assumingthat CPU 211 detects in S4 that Solar Panel Controller Version Data20663b10 of Communication Device 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sendsa New Solar Panel Controller Sending Request, which is received by HostH (S5). Here, the New Solar Panel Controller Sending Request is arequest to send Solar Panel Controller H63OSo stored in Host H toCommunication Device 200. Host H retrieves Solar Panel ControllerH63OSo, which is of the latest version, from Operating System StorageArea H63OS, and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S6).Upon receiving Solar Panel Controller H63OSo from Host H (S7), CPU 211stores Solar Panel Controller H63OSo as Solar Panel Controller 20663OSoin Operating System 20663OS (S8). The old version of Solar PanelController 20663OSo is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates Speaker Controller Updating Software H63c1pof Host H and Speaker Controller Updating Software 20663c1p ofCommunication Device 200, which update Speaker Controller 20663OSpstored in Operating System 20663OS of Communication Device 200. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrievesSpeaker Controller Version Data 20663b1p from OS Version Data StorageArea 20663b1 and sends the data to Host H (S1). Upon receiving SpeakerController Version Data 20663b1p from Communication Device 200 (S2),Host H compares Speaker Controller Version Data 20663b1p with SpeakerController Version Data H63b1p stored in OS Version Data Storage AreaH63b1 of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host H detects in S3 that SpeakerController Version Data 20663b1p of Communication Device 200 is of anold version. Host H retrieves Speaker Controller H63OSp, which is of thelatest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS, and sends thecontroller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Upon receiving SpeakerController H63OSp from Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores Speaker ControllerH63OSp as Speaker Controller 20663OSp in Operating System 20663OS (S6).The old version of Speaker Controller 20663OSp is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates another embodiment of Speaker ControllerUpdating Software H63c1p of Host H and Speaker Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1p of Communication Device 200, which update SpeakerController 20663OSp stored in Operating System 20663OS of CommunicationDevice 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device200 sends a Speaker Controller Update Request, which is received by HostH (S1). Here, the Speaker Controller Update Request is a request to sendSpeaker Controller Version Data H63b1p stored in Host H to CommunicationDevice 200. In response to the request, Host H retrieves SpeakerController Version Data H63b1p from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1,and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2). Upon receivingSpeaker Controller Version Data H63b1p from Host H (S3), CPU 211compares Speaker Controller Version Data H63b1p with Speaker ControllerVersion Data 20663b1p stored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1 ofCommunication Device 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU 211 detects in S4 thatSpeaker Controller Version Data 20663b1p of Communication Device 200 isof an old version. CPU 211 sends a New Speaker Controller SendingRequest, which is received by Host H (S5). Here, the New SpeakerController Sending Request is a request to send Speaker ControllerH63OSp stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Host H retrievesSpeaker Controller H63OSp, which is of the latest version, fromOperating System Storage Area H63OS, and sends the controller toCommunication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving Speaker Controller H63OSpfrom Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores Speaker Controller H63OSp as SpeakerController 20663OSp in Operating System 20663OS (S8). The old version ofSpeaker Controller 20663OSp is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates Vibrator Controller Updating Software H63c1qof Host H and Vibrator Controller Updating Software 20663c1q ofCommunication Device 200, which update Vibrator Controller 20663OSqstored in Operating System 20663OS of Communication Device 200. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrievesVibrator Controller Version Data 20663b1q from OS Version Data StorageArea 20663b1 and sends the data to Host H (S1). Upon receiving VibratorController Version Data 20663b1q from Communication Device 200 (S2),Host H compares Vibrator Controller Version Data 20663b1q with VibratorController Version Data H63b1q stored in OS Version Data Storage AreaH63b1 of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host H detects in S3 that VibratorController Version Data 20663b1q of Communication Device 200 is of anold version. Host H retrieves Vibrator Controller H63OSq, which is ofthe latest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS, and sendsthe controller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Upon receiving VibratorController H63OSq from Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores Vibrator ControllerH63OSq as Vibrator Controller 20663OSq in Operating System 20663OS (S6).The old version of Vibrator Controller 20663OSq is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates another embodiment of Vibrator ControllerUpdating Software H63c1q of Host H and Vibrator Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1q of Communication Device 200, which update VibratorController 20663OSq stored in Operating System 20663OS of CommunicationDevice 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device200 sends a Vibrator Controller Update Request, which is received byHost H (S1). Here, the Vibrator Controller Update Request is a requestto send Vibrator Controller Version Data H63b1q stored in Host H toCommunication Device 200. In response to the request, Host H retrievesVibrator Controller Version Data H63b1q from OS Version Data StorageArea H63b1, and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2). Uponreceiving Vibrator Controller Version Data H63b1q from Host H (S3), CPU211 compares Vibrator Controller Version Data H63b1q with VibratorController Version Data 20663b1q stored in OS Version Data Storage Area20663b1 of Communication Device 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU 211 detectsin S4 that Vibrator Controller Version Data 20663b1q of CommunicationDevice 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sends a New Vibrator ControllerSending Request, which is received by Host H (S5). Here, the NewVibrator Controller Sending Request is a request to send VibratorController H63OSq stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Host Hretrieves Vibrator Controller H63OSq, which is of the latest version,from Operating System Storage Area H63OS, and sends the controller toCommunication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving Vibrator Controller H63OSqfrom Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores Vibrator Controller H63OSq as VibratorController 20663OSq in Operating System 20663OS (S8). The old version ofVibrator Controller 20663OSq is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates Video Processor Controller Updating SoftwareH63c1r of Host H and Video Processor Controller Updating Software20663c1r of Communication Device 200, which update Video ProcessorController 20663OSr stored in Operating System 20663OS of CommunicationDevice 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device200 retrieves Video Processor Controller Version Data 20663b1r from OSVersion Data Storage Area 20663b1 and sends the data to Host H (S1).Upon receiving Video Processor Controller Version Data 20663b1r fromCommunication Device 200 (S2), Host H compares Video ProcessorController Version Data 20663b1r with Video Processor Controller VersionData H63b1r stored in OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 of Host H (S3).Assuming that Host H detects in S3 that Video Processor ControllerVersion Data 20663b1r of Communication Device 200 is of an old version.Host H retrieves Video Processor Controller H63OSr, which is of thelatest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS, and sends thecontroller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Upon receiving VideoProcessor Controller H63OSr from Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores VideoProcessor Controller H63OSr as Video Processor Controller 20663OSr inOperating System 20663OS (S6). The old version of Video ProcessorController 20663OSr is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates another embodiment of Video ProcessorController Updating Software H63c1r of Host H and Video ProcessorController Updating Software 20663c1r of Communication Device 200, whichupdate Video Processor Controller 20663OSr stored in Operating System20663OS of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a Video Processor ControllerUpdate Request, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, the VideoProcessor Controller Update Request is a request to send Video ProcessorController Version Data H63b1r stored in Host H to Communication Device200. In response to the request, Host H retrieves Video ProcessorController Version Data H63b1r from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1,and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2). Upon receivingVideo Processor Controller Version Data H63b1r from Host H (S3), CPU 211compares Video Processor Controller Version Data H63b1r with VideoProcessor Controller Version Data 20663b1r stored in OS Version DataStorage Area 20663b1 of Communication Device 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 that Video Processor Controller Version Data 20663b1rof Communication Device 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sends a NewVideo Processor Controller Sending Request, which is received by Host H(S5). Here, the New Video Processor Controller Sending Request is arequest to send Video Processor Controller H63OSr stored in Host H toCommunication Device 200. Host H retrieves Video Processor ControllerH63OSr, which is of the latest version, from Operating System StorageArea H63OS, and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S6).Upon receiving Video Processor Controller H63OSr from Host H (S7), CPU211 stores Video Processor Controller H63OSr as Video ProcessorController 20663OSr in Operating System 20663OS (S8). The old version ofVideo Processor Controller 20663OSr is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates Wireless Receiver Controller UpdatingSoftware H63c1s of Host H and Wireless Receiver Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1s of Communication Device 200, which update WirelessReceiver Controller 20663OSs stored in Operating System 20663OS ofCommunication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 retrieves Wireless Receiver Controller VersionData 20663b1s from OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1 and sends thedata to Host H (S1). Upon receiving Wireless Receiver Controller VersionData 20663b1s from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H comparesWireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663b1s with WirelessReceiver Controller Version Data H63b1s stored in OS Version DataStorage Area H63b1 of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host H detects in S3that Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663b1s of CommunicationDevice 200 is of an old version. Host H retrieves Wireless ReceiverController H63OSs, which is of the latest version, from Operating SystemStorage Area H63OS, and sends the controller to Communication Device 200(S4). Upon receiving Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSs from Host H(S5), CPU 211 stores Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSs as WirelessReceiver Controller 20663OSs in Operating System 20663OS (S6). The oldversion of Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSs is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates another embodiment of Wireless ReceiverController Updating Software H63c1s of Host H and Wireless ReceiverController Updating Software 20663c1s of Communication Device 200, whichupdate Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSs stored in Operating System20663OS of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a Wireless ReceiverController Update Request#1, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, theWireless Receiver Controller Update Request#1 is a request to sendWireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63b1s stored in Host H toCommunication Device 200. In response to the request, Host H retrievesWireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63b1s from OS Version DataStorage Area H63b1, and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2).Upon receiving Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63b1s fromHost H (S3), CPU 211 compares Wireless Receiver Controller Version DataH63b1s with Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663b1s stored inOS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1 of Communication Device 200 (S4).Assuming that CPU 211 detects in S4 that Wireless Receiver ControllerVersion Data 20663b1s of Communication Device 200 is of an old version.CPU 211 sends a New Wireless Receiver Controller Sending Request#1,which is received by Host H (S5). Here, the New Wireless ReceiverController Sending Request#1 is a request to send Wireless ReceiverController H63OSs stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Host Hretrieves Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSs, which is of the latestversion, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS, and sends thecontroller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving WirelessReceiver Controller H63OSs from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores WirelessReceiver Controller H63OSs as Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSs inOperating System 20663OS (S8). The old version of Wireless ReceiverController 20663OSs is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates Wireless Receiver Controller UpdatingSoftware H63c1t of Host H and Wireless Receiver Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1t of Communication Device 200, which update WirelessReceiver Controller 20663OSt stored in Operating System 20663OS ofCommunication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 retrieves Wireless Receiver Controller VersionData 20663b1t from OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1 and sends thedata to Host H (S1). Upon receiving Wireless Receiver Controller VersionData 20663b1t from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H comparesWireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663b1t with WirelessReceiver Controller Version Data H63b1t stored in OS Version DataStorage Area H63b1 of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host H detects in S3that Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663b1t of CommunicationDevice 200 is of an old version. Host H retrieves Wireless ReceiverController H63OSt, which is of the latest version, from Operating SystemStorage Area H63OS, and sends the controller to Communication Device 200(S4). Upon receiving Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSt from Host H(S5), CPU 211 stores Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSt as WirelessReceiver Controller 20663OSt in Operating System 20663OS (S6). The oldversion of Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSt is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates another embodiment of Wireless ReceiverController Updating Software H63c1t of Host H and Wireless ReceiverController Updating Software 20663c1t of Communication Device 200, whichupdate Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSt stored in Operating System20663OS of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a Wireless ReceiverController Update Request#2, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, theWireless Receiver Controller Update Request#2 is a request to sendWireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63b1t stored in Host H toCommunication Device 200. In response to the request, Host H retrievesWireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63b1t from OS Version DataStorage Area H63b1, and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2).Upon receiving Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63b1t fromHost H (S3), CPU 211 compares Wireless Receiver Controller Version DataH63b1t with Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663b1t stored inOS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1 of Communication Device 200 (S4).Assuming that CPU 211 detects in S4 that Wireless Receiver ControllerVersion Data 20663b1t of Communication Device 200 is of an old version.CPU 211 sends a New Wireless Receiver Controller Sending Request#2,which is received by Host H (S5). Here, the New Wireless ReceiverController Sending Request#2 is a request to send Wireless ReceiverController H63OSt stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Host Hretrieves Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSt, which is of the latestversion, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS, and sends thecontroller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving WirelessReceiver Controller H63OSt from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores WirelessReceiver Controller H63OSt as Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSt inOperating System 20663OS (S8). The old version of Wireless ReceiverController 20663OSt is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates Wireless Receiver Controller UpdatingSoftware H63c1u of Host H and Wireless Receiver Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1u of Communication Device 200, which update WirelessReceiver Controller 20663OSu stored in Operating System 20663OS ofCommunication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 retrieves Wireless Receiver Controller VersionData 20663b1u from OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1 and sends thedata to Host H (S1). Upon receiving Wireless Receiver Controller VersionData 20663b1u from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H comparesWireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663b1u with WirelessReceiver Controller Version Data H63b1u stored in OS Version DataStorage Area H63b1 of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host H detects in S3that Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663b1u of CommunicationDevice 200 is of an old version. Host H retrieves Wireless ReceiverController H63OSu, which is of the latest version, from Operating SystemStorage Area H63OS, and sends the controller to Communication Device 200(S4). Upon receiving Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSu from Host H(S5), CPU 211 stores Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSu as WirelessReceiver Controller 20663OSu in Operating System 20663OS (S6). The oldversion of Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSu is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates another embodiment of Wireless ReceiverController Updating Software H63c1u of Host H and Wireless ReceiverController Updating Software 20663c1u of Communication Device 200, whichupdate Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSu stored in Operating System20663OS of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a Wireless ReceiverController Update Request#3, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, theWireless Receiver Controller Update Request#3 is a request to sendWireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63b1u stored in Host H toCommunication Device 200. In response to the request, Host H retrievesWireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63b1u from OS Version DataStorage Area H63b1, and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2).Upon receiving Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63b1u fromHost H (S3), CPU 211 compares Wireless Receiver Controller Version DataH63b1u with Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663b1u stored inOS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1 of Communication Device 200 (S4).Assuming that CPU 211 detects in S4 that Wireless Receiver ControllerVersion Data 20663b1u of Communication Device 200 is of an old version.CPU 211 sends a New Wireless Receiver Controller Sending Request#3,which is received by Host H (S5). Here, the New Wireless ReceiverController Sending Request#3 is a request to send Wireless ReceiverController H63OSu stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Host Hretrieves Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSu, which is of the latestversion, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS, and sends thecontroller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving WirelessReceiver Controller H63OSu from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores WirelessReceiver Controller H63OSu as Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSu inOperating System 20663OS (S8). The old version of Wireless ReceiverController 20663OSu is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates Wireless Transmitter Controller UpdatingSoftware H63c1v of Host H and Wireless Transmitter Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1v of Communication Device 200, which update WirelessTransmitter Controller 20663OSv stored in Operating System 20663OS ofCommunication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 retrieves Wireless Transmitter ControllerVersion Data 20663b1v from OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1 andsends the data to Host H (S1). Upon receiving Wireless TransmitterController Version Data 20663b1v from Communication Device 200 (S2),Host H compares Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data 20663b1vwith Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data H63b1v stored in OSVersion Data Storage Area H63b1 of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host Hdetects in S3 that Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data 20663b1vof Communication Device 200 is of an old version. Host H retrievesWireless Transmitter Controller H63OSv, which is of the latest version,from Operating System Storage Area H63OS, and sends the controller toCommunication Device 200 (S4). Upon receiving Wireless TransmitterController H63OSv from Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores Wireless TransmitterController H63OSv as Wireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSv inOperating System 20663OS (S6). The old version of Wireless TransmitterController 20663OSv is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates another embodiment of Wireless TransmitterController Updating Software H63c1v of Host H and Wireless TransmitterController Updating Software 20663c1v of Communication Device 200, whichupdate Wireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSv stored in OperatingSystem 20663OS of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a Wireless TransmitterController Update Request#1, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, theWireless Transmitter Controller Update Request#1 is a request to sendWireless Transmitter Controller Version Data H63b1v stored in Host H toCommunication Device 200. In response to the request, Host H retrievesWireless Transmitter Controller Version Data H63b1v from OS Version DataStorage Area H63b1, and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2).Upon receiving Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data H63b1v fromHost H (S3), CPU 211 compares Wireless Transmitter Controller VersionData H63b1v with Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data 20663b1vstored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1 of Communication Device200 (S4). Assuming that CPU 211 detects in S4 that Wireless TransmitterController Version Data 20663b1v of Communication Device 200 is of anold version. CPU 211 sends a New Wireless Transmitter Controller SendingRequest#1, which is received by Host H (S5). Here, the New WirelessTransmitter Controller Sending Request#1 is a request to send WirelessTransmitter Controller H63OSv stored in Host H to Communication Device200. Host H retrieves Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSv, which isof the latest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS, andsends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receivingWireless Transmitter Controller H63OSv from Host H (S7), CPU 211 storesWireless Transmitter Controller H63OSv as Wireless TransmitterController 20663OSv in Operating System 20663OS (S8). The old version ofWireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSv is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates Wireless Transmitter Controller UpdatingSoftware H63c1w of Host H and Wireless Transmitter Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1w of Communication Device 200, which update WirelessTransmitter Controller 20663OSw stored in Operating System 20663OS ofCommunication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 retrieves Wireless Transmitter ControllerVersion Data 20663b1w from OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1 andsends the data to Host H (S1). Upon receiving Wireless TransmitterController Version Data 20663b1w from Communication Device 200 (S2),Host H compares Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data 20663b1wwith Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data H63b1w stored in OSVersion Data Storage Area H63b1 of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host Hdetects in S3 that Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data 20663b1wof Communication Device 200 is of an old version. Host H retrievesWireless Transmitter Controller H63OSw, which is of the latest version,from Operating System Storage Area H63OS, and sends the controller toCommunication Device 200 (S4). Upon receiving Wireless TransmitterController H63OSw from Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores Wireless TransmitterController H63OSw as Wireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSw inOperating System 20663OS (S6). The old version of Wireless TransmitterController 20663OSw is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates another embodiment of Wireless TransmitterController Updating Software H63c1w of Host H and Wireless TransmitterController Updating Software 20663c1w of Communication Device 200, whichupdate Wireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSw stored in OperatingSystem 20663OS of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a Wireless TransmitterController Update Request#2, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, theWireless Transmitter Controller Update Request#2 is a request to sendWireless Transmitter Controller Version Data H63b1w stored in Host H toCommunication Device 200. In response to the request, Host H retrievesWireless Transmitter Controller Version Data H63b1w from OS Version DataStorage Area H63b1, and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2).Upon receiving Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data H63b1w fromHost H (S3), CPU 211 compares Wireless Transmitter Controller VersionData H63b1w with Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data 20663b1wstored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1 of Communication Device200 (S4). Assuming that CPU 211 detects in S4 that Wireless TransmitterController Version Data 20663b1w of Communication Device 200 is of anold version. CPU 211 sends a New Wireless Transmitter Controller SendingRequest#2, which is received by Host H (S5). Here, the New WirelessTransmitter Controller Sending Request#2 is a request to send WirelessTransmitter Controller H63OSw stored in Host H to Communication Device200. Host H retrieves Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSw, which isof the latest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS, andsends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receivingWireless Transmitter Controller H63OSw from Host H (S7), CPU 211 storesWireless Transmitter Controller H63OSw as Wireless TransmitterController 20663OSw in Operating System 20663OS (S8). The old version ofWireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSw is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates Wireless Transmitter Controller UpdatingSoftware H63c1x of Host H and Wireless Transmitter Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1x of Communication Device 200, which update WirelessTransmitter Controller 20663OSx stored in Operating System 20663OS ofCommunication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 retrieves Wireless Transmitter ControllerVersion Data 20663b1x from OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1 andsends the data to Host H (S1). Upon receiving Wireless TransmitterController Version Data 20663b1x from Communication Device 200 (S2),Host H compares Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data 20663b1xwith Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data H63b1x stored in OSVersion Data Storage Area H63b1 of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host Hdetects in S3 that Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data 20663b1xof Communication Device 200 is of an old version. Host H retrievesWireless Transmitter Controller H63OSx, which is of the latest version,from Operating System Storage Area H63OS, and sends the controller toCommunication Device 200 (S4). Upon receiving Wireless TransmitterController H63OSx from Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores Wireless TransmitterController H63OSx as Wireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSx inOperating System 20663OS (S6). The old version of Wireless TransmitterController 20663OSx is deleted.

This paragraph illustrates another embodiment of Wireless TransmitterController Updating Software H63c1x of Host H and Wireless TransmitterController Updating Software 20663c1x of Communication Device 200, whichupdate Wireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSx stored in OperatingSystem 20663OS of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a Wireless TransmitterController Update Request#3, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, theWireless Transmitter Controller Update Request#3 is a request to sendWireless Transmitter Controller Version Data H63b1x stored in Host H toCommunication Device 200. In response to the request, Host H retrievesWireless Transmitter Controller Version Data H63b1x from OS Version DataStorage Area H63b1, and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2).Upon receiving Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data H63b1x fromHost H (S3), CPU 211 compares Wireless Transmitter Controller VersionData H63b1x with Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data 20663b1xstored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1 of Communication Device200 (S4). Assuming that CPU 211 detects in S4 that Wireless TransmitterController Version Data 20663b1x of Communication Device 200 is of anold version. CPU 211 sends a New Wireless Transmitter Controller SendingRequest#3, which is received by Host H (S5). Here, the New WirelessTransmitter Controller Sending Request#3 is a request to send WirelessTransmitter Controller H63OSx stored in Host H to Communication Device200. Host H retrieves Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSx, which isof the latest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS, andsends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receivingWireless Transmitter Controller H63OSx from Host H (S7), CPU 211 storesWireless Transmitter Controller H63OSx as Wireless TransmitterController 20663OSx in Operating System 20663OS (S8). The old version ofWireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSx is deleted.

As another embodiment, each and all data and software programs describedin this specification stored in Communication Device 200 may be updatedin the manner described hereinbefore.

For the avoidance of doubt, the present function may be utilized torepair the operating system of Communication Device 200, i.e., OperatingSystem 20663OS) in the form of downloading updates.

<<OCR Function>>

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in RAM 206 (FIG.1). In this embodiment, RAM 206 includes OCR Information Storage Area20666a of which the data and the software programs stored therein aredescribed hereinafter.

The data and/or the software programs stored in OCR Information StorageArea 20666a may be downloaded from Host H.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in OCR InformationStorage Area 20666a. In this embodiment, OCR Information Storage Area20666a includes OCR Data Storage Area 20666b and OCR Software StorageArea 20666c. OCR Data Storage Area 20666b stores the data necessary toimplement the present function, such as the ones described hereinafter.OCR Software Storage Area 20666c stores the software programs necessaryto implement the present function, such as the ones describedhereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in OCR DataStorage Area 20666b. In this embodiment, OCR Data Storage Area 20666bincludes Web Address Data Storage Area 20666b1, Email Address DataStorage Area 20666b2, Phone Data Storage Area 20666b3, Alphanumeric DataStorage Area 20666b4, Image Data Storage Area 20666b5, and Work Area20666b6. Web Address Data Storage Area 20666b1 stores the data describedhereinafter. Email Address Data Storage Area 20666b2 stores the datadescribed hereinafter. Phone Data Storage Area 20666b3 stores the datadescribed hereinafter. Alphanumeric Data Storage Area 20666b4 stores thedata described hereinafter. Image Data Storage Area 20666b5 stores thedata described hereinafter. Work Area 20666b6 is utilized as a work areato perform calculation and temporarily store data.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Web Address Data StorageArea 20666b1. In this embodiment, Web Address Data Storage Area 20666b1comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Web Address ID’ and ‘Web Address Data’.Column ‘Web Address ID’ stores the web address IDs, and each web addressID is the title of the corresponding web address data stored in column‘Web Address Data’ utilized for identification purposes. Column ‘WebAddress Data’ stores the web address data, and each web address datarepresents a web address composed of alphanumeric data of which thefirst portion thereof is ‘http://’. In this embodiment, Web Address DataStorage Area 20666b1 stores the following data: the web address ID ‘WebAddress#1’ and the corresponding web address data ‘Web Address Data#1’;the web address ID ‘Web Address#2’ and the corresponding web addressdata ‘Web Address Data#2’; the web address ID ‘Web Address#3’ and thecorresponding web address data ‘Web Address Data#3’; and the web addressID ‘Web Address#4’ and the corresponding web address data ‘Web AddressData#4’.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Email Address Data StorageArea 20666b2. In this embodiment, Email Address Data Storage Area20666b2 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Email Address ID’ and ‘EmailAddress Data’. Column ‘Email Address ID’ stores the email address IDs,and each email address ID is the title of the corresponding emailaddress data stored in column ‘Email Address Data’ utilized foridentification purposes. Column ‘Email Address Data’ stores the emailaddress data, and each email address data represents an email addresscomposed of alphanumeric data which includes ‘@’ mark therein. In thisembodiment, Email Address Data Storage Area 20666b2 stores the followingdata: the email address ID ‘Email Address#1’ and the corresponding emailaddress data ‘Email Address Data#1; the email address ID ‘EmailAddress#2’ and the corresponding email address data ‘Email AddressData#2’; the email address ID ‘Email Address#3’ and the correspondingemail address data ‘Email Address Data#3’; and the email address ID‘Email Address#4’ and the corresponding email address data ‘EmailAddress Data#4’.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Phone Data Storage Area20666b3. In this embodiment, Phone Data Storage Area 20666b3 comprisestwo columns, i.e., ‘Phone ID’ and ‘Phone Data’. Column ‘Phone ID’ storesthe phone IDs, and each phone ID is the title of the corresponding phonedata stored in column ‘Phone Data’ utilized for identification purposes.Column ‘Phone Data’ stores the phone data, and each phone datarepresents a phone number composed of numeric figure of which the formatis ‘xxx-xxx-xxxx’. In this embodiment, Phone Data Storage Area 20666b3stores the following data: the phone ID ‘Phone#1’ and the correspondingphone data ‘Phone Data#1’; the phone ID ‘Phone#2’ and the correspondingphone data ‘Phone Data#2’; the phone ID ‘Phone#3’ and the correspondingphone data ‘Phone Data#3’; and the phone ID ‘Phone#4’ and thecorresponding phone data ‘Phone Data#4’.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Alphanumeric Data StorageArea 20666b4. In this embodiment, Alphanumeric Data Storage Area 20666b4comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Alphanumeric ID’ and ‘Alphanumeric Data’.Column ‘Alphanumeric ID’ stores alphanumeric IDs, and each alphanumericID is the title of the corresponding alphanumeric data stored in column‘Alphanumeric Data’ utilized for identification purposes. Column‘Alphanumeric Data’ stores the alphanumeric data, and each alphanumericdata represents alphanumeric figure primarily composed of numbers,texts, words, and letters. In this embodiment, Alphanumeric Data StorageArea 20666b4 stores the following data: the alphanumeric ID‘Alphanumeric#1’ and the corresponding alphanumeric data ‘AlphanumericData#1’; the alphanumeric ID ‘Alphanumeric#2’ and the correspondingalphanumeric data ‘Alphanumeric Data#2’; the alphanumeric ID‘Alphanumeric#3’ and the corresponding alphanumeric data ‘AlphanumericData#3’; and the alphanumeric ID ‘Alphanumeric#4’ and the correspondingalphanumeric data ‘Alphanumeric Data#4’.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Image Data Storage Area20666b5. In this embodiment, Image Data Storage Area 20666b5 comprisestwo columns, i.e., ‘Image ID’ and ‘Image Data’. Column ‘Image ID’ storesthe image IDs, and each image ID is the title of the corresponding imagedata stored in column ‘Image Data’ utilized for identification purposes.Column ‘Image Data’ stores the image data, and each image data is a datacomposed of image such as the image input via CCD Unit 214 (FIG. 1). Inthis embodiment, Image Data Storage Area 20666b5 stores the followingdata: the Image ID ‘Image#1’ and the corresponding Image Data ‘ImageData#1’; the Image ID ‘Image#2’ and the corresponding Image Data ‘ImageData#2’; the Image ID ‘Image#3’ and the corresponding Image Data ‘ImageData#3’; and the Image ID ‘Image#4’ and the corresponding Image Data‘Image Data#4’.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in OCR SoftwareStorage Area 20666c. In this embodiment, OCR Software Storage Area20666c stores Image Data Scanning Software 20666c1, Image Data StoringSoftware 20666c2, OCR Software 20666c3, Alphanumeric Data StoringSoftware 20666c4, Web Address Data Identifying Software 20666c5a, WebAddress Data Correcting Software 20666c5b, Web Address Data StoringSoftware 20666c5c, Address Accessing Software 20666c5d, Email AddressData Identifying Software 20666c6a, Email Address Data CorrectingSoftware 20666c6b, Email Address Data Storing Software 20666c6c, EmailEditing Software 20666c6d, Phone Data Identifying Software 20666c7a,Phone Data Correcting Software 20666c7b, Phone Data Storing Software20666c7c, and Dialing Software 20666c7d. Image Data Scanning Software20666c1 is the software program described hereinafter. Image DataStoring Software 20666c2 is the software program described hereinafter.OCR Software 20666c3 is the software program described hereinafter.Alphanumeric Data Storing Software 20666c4 is the software programdescribed hereinafter. Web Address Data Identifying Software 20666c5a isthe software program described hereinafter. Web Address Data CorrectingSoftware 20666c5b is the software program described hereinafter. WebAddress Data Storing Software 20666c5c is the software program describedhereinafter. Web Address Accessing Software 20666c5d is the softwareprogram described hereinafter. Email Address Data Identifying Software20666c6a is the software program described hereinafter. Email AddressData Correcting Software 20666c6b is the software program describedhereinafter. Email Address Data Storing Software 20666c6c is thesoftware program described hereinafter. Email Editing Software 20666c6dis the software program described hereinafter. Phone Data IdentifyingSoftware 20666c7a is the software program described hereinafter. PhoneData Correcting Software 20666c7b is the software program describedhereinafter. Phone Data Storing Software 20666c7c is the softwareprogram described hereinafter. Dialing Software 20666c7d is the softwareprogram described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates Image Data Scanning Software 20666c1 (notshown) of Communication Device 200, which scans an image by utilizingCCD Unit (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) scans an imageby utilizing CCD Unit (FIG. 1) (S1), and stores the extracted image datain Work Area 20666b6 (S2). CPU 211 then retrieves the image data fromWork Area 20666b6 and displays the data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S3).

This paragraph illustrates Image Data Storing Software 20666c2 (notshown) of Communication Device 200, which stores the image data scannedby CCD Unit (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) retrieves theimage data from Work Area 20666b6 and displays the data On LCD 201(FIG. 1) (S1). The user of Communication Device 200 inputs an image ID,i.e., a title of the image data by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1)or via voice recognition system (S2). CPU 211 then stores the image IDand the image data in Image Data Storage Area 20666b5 (S3).

This paragraph illustrates OCR Software 20666c3 (not shown) ofCommunication Device 200, which extracts alphanumeric data from imagedata by utilizing the method so-called ‘optical character recognition’or ‘OCR’. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) retrieves the image IDsfrom Image Data Storage Area 20666b5 and displays the data on LCD 201(FIG. 1) (S1). The user of Communication Device 200 selects one of theimage IDs by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system (S2). CPU 211 then retrieves the image data of theimage ID selected in S2 from Image Data Storage Area 20666b5 anddisplays the image data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S3). CPU 211 executes theOCR process, i.e., extracts alphanumeric data from the image data (S4),and stores the extracted alphanumeric data in Work Area 20666b6 (S5).

This paragraph illustrates Alphanumeric Data Storing Software 20666c4(not shown) of Communication Device 200, which stores the extractedalphanumeric data in Alphanumeric Data Storage Area 20666b4. In thisembodiment, the user of Communication Device 200 inputs an alphanumericID (i.e., the title of the alphanumeric data) (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1)then retrieves the alphanumeric data from Work Area 20666b6 (S2), andstores the data in Alphanumeric Data Storage Area 20666b4 with theAlphanumeric ID (S3).

This paragraph illustrates Web Address Data Identifying Software20666c5a (not shown) of Communication Device 200, which identifies theweb address data among the Alphanumeric Data. In this embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) retrieves the alphanumeric IDs from Alphanumeric DataStorage Area 20666b4 and displays the alphanumeric IDs on LCD 201(FIG. 1) (S1). The user of Communication Device 200 selects one of theAlphanumeric IDs by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system (S2). CPU 211 retrieves the correspondingalphanumeric data from Alphanumeric Data Storage Area 20666b4 anddisplays the data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S3). CPU 211 stores thealphanumeric data retrieved in S3 in Work Area 20666b6 for the webaddress data identification explained in the next step (S4). CPU 211scans the alphanumeric data, i.e., applies the web address criteria (forexample, ‘http://’, ‘www.’, ‘.com’, ‘.org’, ‘.edu’) to each alphanumericdata, and identifies the web address data included therein (S5). CPU 211emphasizes the identified web address data by changing the font color(for example, blue) and drawing underlines to the identified web addressdata (S6). CPU 211 displays the alphanumeric data with the identifiedweb address data emphasized on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) thereafter (S7).

This paragraph illustrates Web Address Data Correcting Software 20666c5b(not shown) of Communication Device 200, which corrects themisidentified web address data by manually selecting the start point andthe end point of the web address data. For example, if the web addressdata is misidentified as ‘www.yahoo’ and leaves out the remaining‘.com’, the user of Communication Device 200 may manually correct theweb address data by selecting the start point and the end point of‘www.yahoo.com’. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) displays thealphanumeric data with web address data emphasized (S1). The user ofCommunication Device 200 selects the start point of the web address data(S2) and the end point of the web address data by utilizing Input Device210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S3). CPU 211 thenidentifies the alphanumeric data located between the start point and theend point as web address data (S4), and emphasizes the web address databy changing the font color (for example, blue) and drawing underlinesthereto (S5). The alphanumeric data with the web address data emphasizedare displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) thereafter (S6).

This paragraph illustrates Web Address Data Storing Software 20666c5c(not shown) of Communication Device 200, which stores the web addressdata in Web Address Data Storage Area 20666b1. In this embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) displays the alphanumeric data with web address dataemphasized (S1). The user of Communication Device 200 selects one of theweb address data by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system, and CPU 211 emphasizes the data (for example, changeto bold font) (S2). The user then inputs the web address ID (the titleof the web address data) (S3). CPU 211 stores the web address ID and theweb address data in Web Address Data Storage Area 20666b1 (S4).

This paragraph illustrates Web Address Accessing Software 20666c5d (notshown) of Communication Device 200, which accesses the web siterepresented by the web address data. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) displays the alphanumeric data with web address data emphasized(S1). The user of Communication Device 200 selects one of the webaddress data by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system (for example, click one of the web address data)(S2). CPU 211 then opens an internet browser (for example, the InternetExplorer) and enters the web address data selected in S2 therein (S3).CPU 211 accesses the web site thereafter (S4).

This paragraph illustrates Email Address Data Identifying Software20666c6a (not shown) of Communication Device 200, which identifies theemail address data among the alphanumeric data. In this embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) retrieves the alphanumeric IDs from Alphanumeric DataStorage Area 20666b4 and displays the alphanumeric IDs on LCD 201(FIG. 1) (S1). The user of Communication Device 200 selects one of thealphanumeric IDs by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system (S2). CPU 211 retrieves the correspondingalphanumeric data from Alphanumeric Data Storage Area 20666b4 anddisplays the data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S3). CPU 211 stores thealphanumeric data retrieved in S3 in Work Area 20666b6 for the emailaddress data identification explained in the next step (S4). CPU 211scans the alphanumeric data, i.e., applies the email address criteria(for example, ‘@’) to each alphanumeric data, and identifies the emailaddress data included therein (S5). CPU 211 emphasizes the identifiedemail address data by changing the font color (for example, green) anddrawing underlines to the identified email address data (S6). CPU 211displays the alphanumeric data with the identified email address dataemphasized on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) thereafter (S7).

This paragraph illustrates Email Address Data Correcting Software20666c6b (not shown) of Communication Device 200, which corrects themisidentified email address data by manually selecting the start pointand the end point of the email address data. For example, if the emailaddress data is misidentified as ‘iwaofujisaki@yahoo’ and leaves out theremaining ‘.com’, the user of Communication Device 200 may manuallycorrect the email address data by selecting the start point and the endpoint of ‘iwaofujisaki@yahoo.com’. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1)displays the alphanumeric data with email address data emphasized (S1).The user of Communication Device 200 selects the start point of theemail address data (S2) and the end point of the email address data byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S3). CPU 211 then identifies the alphanumeric data located between thestart point and the end point as email address data (S4), and emphasizesthe email address data by changing the font color (for example, green)and drawing underlines thereto (S5). The alphanumeric data with theemail address data emphasized are displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)thereafter (S6).

This paragraph illustrates Email Address Data Storing Software 20666c6c(not shown) of Communication Device 200, which stores the email addressdata to Email Address Data Storage Area 20666b2. In this embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) displays the alphanumeric data with the email address dataemphasized (S1). The user of Communication Device 200 selects one of theemail address data, and CPU 211 emphasizes the data (for example, changeto bold font) (S2). The user then inputs the email address ID (the titleof the email address data) by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or viavoice recognition system (S3). CPU 211 stores the email address ID andthe email address data in Email Address Data Storage Area 20666b2 (S4).

This paragraph illustrates Email Editing Software 20666c6d (not shown)of Communication Device 200, which opens an email editor (for example,the Outlook Express) wherein the email address data is set as thereceiver's address. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) displays thealphanumeric data with the email address data emphasized (S1). The userof Communication Device 200 selects one of the email address data (forexample, click one of the email address data) by utilizing Input Device210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S2). CPU 211 then opens anemail editor (for example, the Outlook Express) (S3), and sets the emailaddress data selected in S2 as the receiver's address (S4).

This paragraph illustrates Phone Data Identifying Software 20666c7a (notshown) of Communication Device 200, which identifies the phone dataamong the alphanumeric data. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1)retrieves the alphanumeric IDs from Alphanumeric Data Storage Area20666b4 and displays the alphanumeric IDs on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). Theuser of Communication Device 200 selects one of the alphanumeric IDs(S2). CPU 211 retrieves the corresponding alphanumeric data fromAlphanumeric Data Storage Area 20666b4 and displays the data on LCD 201(FIG. 1) (S3). CPU 211 stores the alphanumeric data retrieved in S3 inWork Area 20666b6 for the phone data identification explained in thenext step (S4). CPU 211 scans the alphanumeric data, i.e., applies thephone criteria (for example, numeric data with ‘xxx-xxx-xxxx’ format) toeach alphanumeric data, and identifies the phone data included therein(S5). CPU 211 emphasizes the identified phone data by changing the fontcolor (for example, yellow) and drawing underlines to the identifiedphone data (S6). CPU 211 displays the alphanumeric data with theidentified phone data emphasized on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) thereafter (S7).

This paragraph illustrates Phone Data Correcting Software 20666c7b (notshown) of Communication Device 200, which corrects the misidentifiedphone data by manually selecting the start point and the end point ofthe phone data. For example, if the phone data is misidentified as‘916-455-’ and leaves out the remaining ‘1293’, the user ofCommunication Device 200 may manually correct the phone data byselecting the start point and the end point of ‘916-455-1293’. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) displays the alphanumeric data with phonedata emphasized (S1). The user of Communication Device 200 selects thestart point of the phone data (S2) and the end point of the phone databy utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S3). CPU 211 then identifies the alphanumeric data located between thestart point and the end point as phone data (S4), and emphasizes thephone data by changing the font color (for example, yellow) and drawingunderlines thereto (S5). The alphanumeric data with the phone dataemphasized are displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) thereafter (S6).

This paragraph illustrates Phone Data Storing Software 20666c7c (notshown) of Communication Device 200, which stores the phone data to PhoneData Storage Area 20666b3. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) displaysthe alphanumeric data with the phone data emphasized (S1). The user ofCommunication Device 200 selects one of the phone data, and CPU 211emphasizes the data (for example, change to bold font) (S2). The userthen inputs the phone ID (the title of the phone data) (S3). CPU 211stores the phone ID and the phone data in Phone Data Storage Area20666b3 (S4).

This paragraph illustrates Dialing Software 20666c7d (not shown) ofCommunication Device 200, which opens a phone dialer and initiates adialing process by utilizing the phone data. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) displays the alphanumeric data with the phone data emphasized(S1). The user of Communication Device 200 selects one of the phone databy utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(for example, click one of the phone data) (S2). CPU 211 then opens aphone dialer (S3), and inputs the phone data selected in S2 (S4). Adialing process is initiated thereafter.

<<Multiple Mode Implementing Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the multiple mode implementingfunction of Communication Device 200 which enables to activate andimplement a plurality of modes, functions, and/or systems described inthis specification simultaneously.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in RAM 206(FIG. 1) to implement the multiple mode implementing function (FIG. 1).In this embodiment, RAM 206 includes Multiple Mode Implementer StorageArea 20690a. Multiple Mode Implementer Storage Area 20690a storesMultiple Mode Implementer 20690b, Mode List Displaying Software 20690c,Mode Selecting Software 20690d, Mode Activating Software 20690e, andMode Implementation Repeater 20690f, all of which are software programs.Multiple Mode Implementer 20690b administers the overall implementationof the present function. One of the major tasks of Multiple ModeImplementer 20690b is to administer and control the timing and sequenceof Mode List Displaying Software 20690c, Mode Selecting Software 20690d,Mode Activating Software 20690e, and Mode Implementation Repeater20690f. For example, Multiple Mode Implementer 20690b executes them inthe following order: Mode List Displaying Software 20690c, ModeSelecting Software 20690d, Mode Activating Software 20690e, and ModeImplementation Repeater 20690f. Mode List Displaying Software 20690cdisplays on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) a list of a certain amount or all modes,functions, and/or systems explained in this specification of which thesequence is explained hereinafter. Mode Selecting Software 20690dselects a certain amount or all modes, functions, and/or systemsexplained in this specification of which the sequence is explainedhereinafter. Mode Activating Software 20690e activates a certain amountor all modes, functions, and/or systems selected by the Mode SelectingSoftware 20690d of which the sequence is explained hereinafter. ModeImplementation Repeater 20690f executes Multiple Mode Implementer 20690bwhich reactivates Mode List Displaying Software 20690c, Mode SelectingSoftware 20690d, Mode Activating Software 20690e of which the sequenceis explained hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of Mode List Displaying Software20690c. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1), under the command of ModeList Displaying Software 20690c, displays a list of a certain amount orall modes, functions, and/or systems described in this specification onLCD 201 (FIG. 1).

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of Mode Selecting Software20690d. In this embodiment, the user of Communication Device 200 inputsan input signal by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system identifying one of the modes, functions, and/orsystems displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1), and CPU 211 (FIG. 1), underthe command of Mode Selecting Software 20690d, interprets the inputsignal and selects the corresponding mode, function, or system (S2).

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of Mode Activating Software20690e. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1), under the command of ModeActivating Software 20690e, activates the mode, function, or, systemselected in S2 explained hereinbefore. CPU 211 thereafter implements theactivated mode, function, or system as described in the relevantparagraphs in this specification.

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of Mode Implementation Repeater20690f. In this embodiment, the user of Communication Device 200 inputsan input signal by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system (S1). Once the activation of the selected mode,function, or system described hereinbefore hereinbefore is completed,and if the input signal indicates to repeat the process to activateanother mode, function, or system (S2), CPU 211 (FIG. 1), under thecommand of Mode Implementation Repeater 20690f, executes Multiple ModeImplementer 20690b, which reactivates Mode List Displaying Software20690c, Mode Selecting Software 20690d, and Mode Activating Software20690e to activate the second mode, function, or system while the firstmode, function, or system is implemented by utilizing the method ofso-called ‘time sharing’ (S3). Mode List Displaying Software 20690c,Mode Selecting Software 20690d, and Mode Activating Software 20690e canbe repeatedly executed until all modes, function, and systems displayedon LCD 201 (FIG. 1) are selected and activated. The activation of modes,functions, and/or systems is not repeated if the input signal explainedin S2 so indicates.

<<Incorporation By Reference>>

The following paragraphs and drawings described in U.S. Ser. No.10/710,600 filed 2004-07-23, now U.S. Pat. No. 8,090,402, areincorporated to this application by reference:

(a) Based on U.S. Ser. No. 10/710,600: the preamble described inparagraph [1806] (no drawings); Communication Device 200 (VoiceCommunication Mode) described in paragraphs [1807] through [1812] (FIGS.1 through 2c); Voice Recognition System described in paragraphs [1813]through [1845] (FIGS. 3 through 19); Positioning System described inparagraphs [1846] through [1877] (FIGS. 20a through 32e); Auto BackupSystem described in paragraphs [1878] through [1887] (FIGS. 33 through37); Signal Amplifier described in paragraphs [1888] through [1893](FIG. 38); Audio/Video Data Capturing System described in paragraphs[1894] through [1906] (FIGS. 39 through 44b); Digital Mirror Function(1) described in paragraphs [1907] through [1915] (FIGS. 44c through44e); Caller ID System described in paragraphs [1916] through [1923](FIGS. 45 through 47); Stock Purchasing Function described in paragraphs[1924] through [1933] (FIGS. 48 through 52); Timer Email Functiondescribed in paragraphs [1934] through [1940] (FIGS. 53a and 53b); CallBlocking Function described in paragraphs [1941] through [1954] (FIGS.54 through 59); Online Payment Function described in paragraphs [1955]through [1964] (FIGS. 60 through 64); Navigation System described inparagraphs [1965] through [1987] (FIGS. 65 through 74a); RemoteControlling System described in paragraphs [1988] through [2006] (FIGS.75 through 85); Auto Emergency Calling System described in paragraphs[2007] through [2015] (FIGS. 86 and 87); Cellular TV Function describedin paragraphs [2016] through [2100] (FIGS. 88 through 135); 3D VideoGame Function described in paragraphs [2101] through [2113] (FIGS. 136through 144); Digital Mirror Function (2) described in paragraphs [2114]through [2123] (FIGS. 145 through 155); Voice Recognition Sys—E-mail (2)described in paragraphs [2124] through [2132] (FIGS. 156 through 160);Positioning System—GPS Search Engine described in paragraphs [2133]through [2175] (FIGS. 161 through 182); Mobile Ignition Key Functiondescribed in paragraphs [2176] through [2198] (FIGS. 183 through 201);Voice Print Authentication System described in paragraphs [2199] through[2209] (FIGS. 202 through 211); Fingerprint Authentication Systemdescribed in paragraphs [2210] through [2222] (FIGS. 212 through 221);Auto Time Adjust Function described in paragraphs [2223] through [2227](FIGS. 222 through 224); Video/Photo Mode described in paragraphs [2228]through [2256] (FIGS. 225 through 242); Call Taxi Function described inparagraphs [2257] through [2297] (FIGS. 243 through 269); Shooting VideoGame Function described in paragraphs [2298] through [2314] (FIGS. 270through 283); Driving Video Game Function described in paragraphs [2315]through [2328] (FIGS. 284 through 294); Address Book Updating Functiondescribed in paragraphs [2329] through [2349] (FIGS. 295 through 312);Batch Address Book Updating Function—With Host described in paragraphs[2350] through [2371] (FIGS. 313 through 329); Batch Address BookUpdating Function—Peer-To-Peer Connection described in paragraphs [2372]through [2376] (FIGS. 329a through 329c); Batch Scheduler UpdatingFunction—With Host described in paragraphs [2377] through [2400] (FIGS.330 through 350); Batch Scheduler Updating Function—Peer-To-PeerConnection described in paragraphs [2401] through [2405] (FIGS. 351 and352); Calculator Function described in paragraphs [2406] through [2411](FIGS. 353 through 356); Spreadsheet Function described in paragraphs[2412] through [2419] (FIGS. 357 through 360); Word Processing Functiondescribed in paragraphs [2420] through [2435] (FIGS. 361 through 373);TV Remote Controller Function described in paragraphs [2436] through[2458] (FIGS. 374 through 394); CD/PC Inter-communicating Functiondescribed in paragraphs [2459] through [2483] (FIGS. 413 through 427);PDWR Sound Selecting Function described in paragraphs [2484] through[2520] (FIGS. 428 through 456); Start Up Software Function described inparagraphs [2521] through [2537] (FIGS. 457 through 466); AnotherEmbodiment Of Communication Device 200 described in paragraphs [2538]through [2542] (FIGS. 467a through 467d); Stereo Audio Data OutputFunction described in paragraphs [2543] through [2562] (FIGS. 468through 479); Stereo Visual Data Output Function described in paragraphs[2563] through [0052] (FIGS. 480 through 491); Multiple SignalProcessing Function described in paragraphs [0053] through [2655] (FIGS.492 through 529); Positioning System—Pin-pointing Function described inparagraphs [2656] through [2689] (FIGS. 530 through 553); ArtificialSatellite Host described in paragraphs [2690] through [2708] (FIGS. 554through 567); CCD Bar Code Reader Function described in paragraphs[2709] through [2730] (FIGS. 568 through 579); Online Renting Functiondescribed in paragraphs [2731] through [2808] (FIGS. 580 through 633);SOS Calling Function described in paragraphs [2809] through [2829](FIGS. 634 through 645); Input Device described in paragraphs [2830]through [2835] (FIGS. 646 through 650); PC Remote Controlling Functiondescribed in paragraphs [2836] through [0105] (FIGS. 651 through 670);PC Remote Downloading Function described in paragraphs [0106] through[2921] (FIGS. 671 through 701); Audiovisual Playback Function describedin paragraphs [2922] through [2947] (FIGS. 702 through 716); AudioPlayback Function described in paragraphs [2948] through [2972] (FIGS.717 through 731); Ticket Purchasing Function described in paragraphs[2973] through [3002] (FIGS. 732 through 753); Remote Data ErasingFunction described in paragraphs [3003] through [3032] (FIGS. 754through 774); Business Card Function described in paragraphs [3033]through [3049] (FIGS. 775 through 783); Game Vibrating Functiondescribed in paragraphs [3050] through [3060] (FIGS. 784 through 786);Part-time Job Finding Function described in paragraphs [3061] through[3081] (FIGS. 787 through 801); Parking Lot Finding Function describedin paragraphs [3082] through [3121] (FIGS. 802 through 832); PartsUpgradable Communication Device described in paragraphs [3122] through[3147] (FIGS. 833a through 833x); On Demand TV Function described inparagraphs [3148] through [3178] (FIGS. 834 through 855);Inter-communicating TV Function described in paragraphs [3179] through[3213] (FIGS. 856 through 882); Display Controlling Function describedin paragraphs [3214] through [3231] (FIGS. 883 through 894); MultipleParty Communicating Function described in paragraphs [3232] through[3265] (FIGS. 894a through 917); Display Brightness Controlling Functiondescribed in paragraphs [3266] through [3275] (FIGS. 918 through 923);Multiple Party Pin-pointing Function described in paragraphs [3276]through [3323] (FIGS. 924 through 950f); Digital Camera Functiondescribed in paragraphs [3324] through [3351] (FIGS. 951 through 968);Phone Number Linking Function described in paragraphs [3352] through[3375] (FIGS. 968a through 983); Multiple Window Displaying Functiondescribed in paragraphs [3376] through [0159] (FIGS. 984 through 995);Mouse Pointer Displaying Function described in paragraphs [0160] through[3432] (FIGS. 996 through 1021); House Item Pin-pointing Functiondescribed in paragraphs [3433] through [3592] (FIGS. 1022 through 1152);Membership Administrating Function described in paragraphs [3593]through [3635] (FIGS. 1153 through 1188); Keyword Search Timer RecordingFunction described in paragraphs [3636] through [0193] (FIGS. 1189through 1254); Weather Forecast Displaying Function described inparagraphs [0194] through [3769] (FIGS. 1255 through 1288); MultipleLanguage Displaying Function described in paragraphs [3770] through[3827] (FIGS. 1289 through 1331); Caller's Information DisplayingFunction described in paragraphs [3828] through [3880] (FIGS. 1332through 1375); Communication Device Remote Controlling Function (ByPhone) described in paragraphs [3881] through [3921] (FIGS. 1394 through1415); Communication Device Remote Controlling Function (By Web)described in paragraphs [3922] through [3962] (FIGS. 1416 through 1437);Shortcut Icon Displaying Function described in paragraphs [3963] through[3990] (FIGS. 1438 through 1455); Task Tray Icon Displaying Functiondescribed in paragraphs [3991] through [4013] (FIGS. 1456 through 1470);Multiple Channel Processing Function described in paragraphs [4014]through [4061] (FIGS. 1471 through 1498); Solar Battery ChargingFunction described in paragraphs [4062] through [4075] (FIGS. 1499through 1509); OS Updating Function described in paragraphs [4076]through [0262] (FIGS. 1510 through 1575); Device Managing Functiondescribed in paragraphs [0263] through [4161] (FIGS. 1576 through 1587);Automobile Controlling Function described in paragraphs [4162] through[0304] (FIGS. 1588 through 1627); OCR Function described in paragraphs[0305] through [4246] (FIGS. 1628 through 1652); Multiple ModeImplementing Function described in paragraphs [4248] through [4255](FIGS. 395 through 400); Multiple Software Download Function describedin paragraphs [4256] through [4265] (FIGS. 401 through 407); SelectedSoftware Distributing Function described in paragraphs [4266] through[4285] (FIGS. 1376 through 1393d); Multiple Software Download And ModeImplementation Function described in paragraphs [4286] through [4293](FIGS. 408 through 412); and the last sentence described in paragraph[4295] (no drawings).

(b) U.S. Pat. No. 8,090,402: the preamble (col 57line 64-col 58line 15;no drawings); Communication Device 200 (Voice Communication Mode) (col58 line 16-col 60 line 2; FIGS. 1 through 2c); Voice Recognition System(col 60 line 3-col 65 line 3; FIGS. 3 through 19); Positioning System(col 65 line 4-col 69 line 46; FIGS. 20a through 32g); Auto BackupSystem (col 69 line 47-col 70 line 51; FIGS. 33 through 37); SignalAmplifier (col 70 line 52-col 71 line 13; FIG. 38); Audio/Video DataCapturing System (col 71 line 14-col 72 line 67; FIGS. 39 through 44b);Digital Mirror Function (1) (col 73 line 1-col 74 line 45; FIGS. 44cthrough 44e); Caller ID System (col 74 line 46-col 75 line 18; FIGS. 45through 47); Stock Purchasing Function (col 75 line 19-col 76 line 23;FIGS. 48 through 52); Timer Email Function (col 76 line 24-col 76 line67; FIGS. 53a and 53b); Call Blocking Function (col 77 line 1-col 78line 35; FIGS. 54 through 59); Online Payment Function (col 78 line36-col 79 line 67; FIGS. 60 through 64); Navigation System (col 80 line1-col 84 line 3; FIGS. 65 through 74a); Remote Controlling System (col84 line 4-col 87 line 10; FIGS. 75 through 85); Auto Emergency CallingSystem (col 87 line 11-col 87 line 62; FIGS. 86 and 87); Cellular TVFunction (col 87 line 63-col 101 line 54; FIGS. 88 through 135); 3DVideo Game Function (col 101 line 55-col 104 line 18; FIGS. 136 through144); Digital Mirror Function (2) (col 104 line 19-col 106 line 6; FIGS.145 through 155); Voice Recognition Sys—E-mail (2) (col 106 line 7-col107 line 38; FIGS. 156 through 160); Positioning System—GPS SearchEngine (col 107 line 39-col 117 line 12; FIGS. 161 through 182); MobileIgnition Key Function (col 117 line 13-col 121 line 35; FIGS. 183through 201); Voice Print Authentication System (col 121 line 36-col 123line 44; FIGS. 202 through 211); Fingerprint Authentication System (col123 line 45-col 126 line 7; FIGS. 212 through 221); Auto Time AdjustFunction (col 126 line 8-col 126 line 48; FIGS. 222 through 224);Video/Photo Mode (col 126 line 49-col 131 line 63; FIGS. 225 through242); Call Taxi Function (col 131 line 64-col 140 line 52; FIGS. 243through 269); Shooting Video Game Function (col 140 line 53-col 143 line42; FIGS. 270 through 283); Driving Video Game Function (col 143 line43-col 146 line 7; FIGS. 284 through 294); Address Book UpdatingFunction (col 146 line 8-col 149 line 13; FIGS. 295 through 312); BatchAddress Book Updating Function—With Host (col 149 line 14-col 152 line4; FIGS. 313 through 329); Batch Address Book UpdatingFunction—Peer-To-Peer Connection (col 152 line 5-col 152 line 49; FIGS.329a through 329c); Batch Scheduler Updating Function—With Host (col 152line 50-col 156 line 16; FIGS. 330 through 350); Batch SchedulerUpdating Function—Peer-To-Peer Connection (col 156 line 17-col 156 line67; FIGS. 351 and 352); Calculator Function (col 157 line 1-col 157 line59; FIGS. 353 through 356); Spreadsheet Function (col 157 line 60-col159 line 9; FIGS. 357 through 360); Word Processing Function (col 159line 10-col 162 line 61; FIGS. 361 through 373); TV Remote ControllerFunction (col 162 line 62-col 167 line 19; FIGS. 374 through 394); CD/PCInter-communicating Function (col 167 line 20-col 171 line 49; FIGS. 413through 427); PDWR Sound Selecting Function (col 171 line 50-col 179line 3; FIGS. 428 through 456); Start Up Software Function (col 179 line4-col 180 line 67; FIGS. 457 through 466); Another Embodiment OfCommunication Device 200 (col 181 line 1-col 183 line 13; FIGS. 467athrough 467d); Stereo Audio Data Output Function (col 183 line 14-col185 line 67; FIGS. 468 through 479); Stereo Visual Data Output Function(col 186 line 1-col 188 line 51; FIGS. 480 through 491); Multiple SignalProcessing Function (col 188 line 52-col 199 line 13; FIGS. 492 through529); Positioning System—Pin-pointing Function (col 199 line 14-col 204line 67; FIGS. 530 through 553); Artificial Satellite Host (col 205 line1-col 208 line 22; FIGS. 554 through 567); CCD Bar Code Reader Function(col 208 line 23-col 211 line 27; FIGS. 568 through 579); Online RentingFunction (col 211 line 28-col 225 line 57; FIGS. 580 through 633); SOSCalling Function (col 225 line 58-col 228 line 31; FIGS. 634 through645); Input Device (col 228 line 32-col 229 line 50; FIGS. 646 through650); PC Remote Controlling Function (col 229 line 51-col 235 line 27;FIGS. 651 through 670); PC Remote Downloading Function (col 235 line28-col 244 line 15; FIGS. 671 through 701); Audiovisual PlaybackFunction (col 244 line 16-col 249 line 15; FIGS. 702 through 716); AudioPlayback Function (col 249 line 16-col 253 line 58; FIGS. 717 through731); Ticket Purchasing Function (col 253 line 59-col 259 line 5; FIGS.732 through 753); Remote Data Erasing Function (col 259 line 6-col 263line 43; FIGS. 754 through 774); Business Card Function (col 263 line44-col 266 line 6; FIGS. 775 through 783); Game Vibrating Function (col266 line 7-col 267 line 17; FIGS. 784 through 786); Part-time JobFinding Function (col 267 line 18-col 270 line 57; FIGS. 787 through801); Parking Lot Finding Function (col 270 line 58-col 277 line 47;FIGS. 802 through 832); Parts Upgradable Communication Device (col 277line 48-col 280 line 67; FIGS. 833a through 833x); On Demand TV Function(col 281 line 1-col 287 line 3; FIGS. 834 through 855);Inter-communicating TV Function (col 287 line 4-col 292 line 6; FIGS.856 through 882); Display Controlling Function (col 292 line 7-col 295line 4; FIGS. 883 through 894); Multiple Party Communicating Function(col 295 line 5-col 301 line 34; FIGS. 894a through 917); DisplayBrightness Controlling Function (col 301 line 35-col 302 line 50; FIGS.918 through 923); Multiple Party Pin-pointing Function (col 302 line51-col 311 line 12; FIGS. 924 through 950f); Digital Camera Function(col 311 line 13-col 316 line 15; FIGS. 951 through 968); Phone NumberLinking Function (col 316 line 16-col 320 line 5; FIGS. 968a through983); Multiple Window Displaying Function (col 320 line 6-col 323 line32; FIGS. 984 through 995); Mouse Pointer Displaying Function (col 323line 33-col 328 line 64; FIGS. 996 through 1021); House ItemPin-pointing Function (col 328 line 65-col 356 line 64; FIGS. 1022through 1152); Membership Administrating Function (col 356 line 65-col363 line 67; FIGS. 1153 through 1188); Keyword Search Timer RecordingFunction (col 364 line 1-col 385 line 55; FIGS. 1189 through 1254);Weather Forecast Displaying Function (col 385 line 56-col 394 line 56;FIGS. 1255 through 1288); Multiple Language Displaying Function (col 394line 57-col 411 line 63; FIGS. 1289 through 1331); Caller's InformationDisplaying Function (col 411 line 64-col 423 line 52; FIGS. 1332 through1375); Communication Device Remote Controlling Function (By Phone) (col423 line 53-col 430 line 46; FIGS. 1394 through 1415); CommunicationDevice Remote Controlling Function (By Web) (col 430 line 47-col 437line 61; FIGS. 1416 through 1437); Shortcut Icon Displaying Function(col 437 line 62-col 442 line 29; FIGS. 1438 through 1455); Task TrayIcon Displaying Function (col 442 line 30-col 445 line 62; FIGS. 1456through 1470); Multiple Channel Processing Function (col 445 line 63-col455 line 27; FIGS. 1471 through 1498); Solar Battery Charging Function(col 455 line 28-col 458 line 26; FIGS. 1499 through 1509); OS UpdatingFunction (col 458 line 27-col 489 line 3; FIGS. 1510 through 1575);Device Managing Function (col 489 line 4-col 492 line 59; FIGS. 1576through 1587); Automobile Controlling Function (col 492 line 60-col 505line 55; FIGS. 1588 through 1627); OCR Function (col 505 line 56-col 512line 51; FIGS. 1628 through 1652); Multiple Mode Implementing Function(col 512 line 52-col 515 line 56; FIGS. 395 through 400); MultipleSoftware Download Function (col 515 line 57-col 518 line 3; FIGS. 401through 407); Selected Software Distributing Function (col 518 line4-col 523 line 54; FIGS. 1376 through 1393d); Multiple Software DownloadAnd Mode Implementation Function (col 523 line 55-col 525 line 33; FIGS.408 through 412); and the last sentence (col 525 line 34-col 525 line51; no drawings). If there is ever discrepancy between the disclosuresof this application and U.S. Pat. No. 8,090,402, the latter prevails.

<<Overall Functions>>

Communication Device 200 is capable to implement the followingfunctions, modes, and systems: a voice communication function whichtransfers a 1st voice data input from the microphone via the wirelesscommunication system and outputs a 2nd voice data received via thewireless communication system from the speaker; a voice recognitionsystem which retrieves alphanumeric information from the user's voiceinput via the microphone; a voice recognition system which retrievesalphanumeric information from the user's voice input via the microphone,and a voice recognition refraining system which refrains fromimplementing the voice recognition system while a voice communication isimplemented by the communication device; a tag function and a phonenumber data storage area, the phone number data storage area includes aplurality of phone numbers, a voice tag is linked to each of theplurality of phone number, when a voice tag is detected in the voicedata retrieved via the microphone, the corresponding phone number isretrieved from the phone number data storage area; a voice recognitionnoise filtering mode, wherein a background noise is identified, afiltered voice data is produced by removing the background noise fromthe voice data input via the microphone, and the communication device isoperated by the filtered voice data; a sound/beep auto off functionwherein the communication device refrains from outputting a sound datastored in a sound data storage area while a voice recognition system isimplemented; a voice recognition system auto off implementor, whereinthe voice recognition system auto off implementor identifies the lapsedtime since a voice recognition system is activated and deactivates thevoice recognition system after a certain period of time has lapsed; avoice recognition email function which produces a voice produced emailwhich is an email produced by alphanumeric information retrieved fromthe user's voice input via the microphone, and the voice produced emailis stored in the data storage area; a voice communication textconverting function, wherein a 1st voice data which indicates the voicedata of the caller and a 2nd voice data which indicates the voice dataof the callee are retrieved, and the 1st voice data and the 2nd voicedata are converted to a 1st text data and a 2nd text data respectively,which are displayed on the display; a target device location indicatingfunction, wherein a target device location data identifying request istransferred to a host computing system in a wireless fashion, a map dataand a target device location data is received from the host computingsystem in a wireless fashion, and the map data with the locationcorresponding to the target device location data indicated thereon isdisplayed on the display; an auto backup function, wherein the dataidentified by the user is automatically retrieved from a data storagearea and transferred to another computing system in a wireless fashionperiodically for purposes of storing a backup data therein; anaudio/video data capturing system which stores an audiovisual dataretrieved via the microphone and a camera installed in the communicationdevice in the data storage area, retrieves the audiovisual data from thedata storage area, and sends the audiovisual data to another device in awireless fashion; a digital mirror function which displays an invertedvisual data of the visual data input via a camera of the communicationdevice on the display; a caller ID function which retrieves apredetermined color data and/or sound data which is specific to thecaller of the incoming call received by the communication device fromthe data storage area and outputs the predetermined color data and/orsound data from the communication device; a stock purchase functionwhich outputs a notice signal from the communication device when thecommunication device receives a notice data wherein the notice data isproduced by a computing system and sent to the communication device whena stock price of a predetermined stock brand meets a predeterminedcriteria; a timer email function which sends an email data stored in thedata storage area to a predetermined email address at the time indicatedby an email data sending time data stored in the data storage area; acall blocking function which blocks the incoming call if theidentification thereof is included in a call blocking list; an onlinepayment function which sends a payment data indicating a certain amountof currency to a certain computing system in a wireless fashion in orderfor the certain computing system to deduct the amount indicated by thepayment data from a certain account stored in the certain computingsystem; a navigation system which produces a map indicating the shortestroute from a first location to a second location by referring to anattribution data; a remote controlling system which sends a 1st remotecontrol signal in a wireless fashion by which a 1st device is controlledvia a network, a 2nd remote control signal in a wireless fashion bywhich a 2nd device is controlled via a network, and a 3rd remote controlsignal in a wireless fashion by which a 3rd device is controlled via anetwork; an auto emergency calling system wherein the communicationdevice transfers an emergency signal to a certain computing system whenan impact of a certain level is detected in a predetermined automobile;a cellular TV function which receives a TV data, which is a series ofdigital data indicating a TV program, via the wireless communicationsystem in a wireless fashion and outputs the TV data from thecommunication device; a 3D video game function which retrieves a 3Dvideo game object, which is controllable by a video game objectcontrolling command input via the input device, from the data storagearea and display the 3D video game object on the display; a GPS searchengine function, wherein a specific criteria is selected by the inputdevice and one or more of geographic locations corresponding to thespecific criteria are indicated on the display; a mobile ignition keyfunction which sends a mobile ignition key signal via the wirelesscommunication system in a wireless fashion in order to ignite an engineof an automobile; a voice print authentication system which implementsauthentication process by utilizing voice data of the user of thecommunication device; a fingerprint authentication system whichimplements authentication process by utilizing fingerprint data of theuser of the communication device; an auto time adjusting function whichautomatically adjusts the clock of the communication device by referringto a wireless signal received by the wireless communication system; avideo/photo function which implements a video mode and a photo mode,wherein the video/photo function displays moving image data under thevideo mode and the video/photo function displays still image data underthe photo mode on the display; a taxi calling function, wherein a 1stlocation which indicates the geographic location of the communicationdevice is identified, a 2nd location which indicates the geographiclocation of the taxi closest to the 1st location is identified, and the1st location and the 2nd location are indicated on the display; a 3Dshooting video game function, wherein the input device utilized forpurposes of implementing a voice communication mode is configured as aninput means for performing a 3D shooting video game, a user controlled3D game object which is the three-dimensional game object controlled bythe user and a CPU controlled 3D game object which is thethree-dimensional game object controlled by the CPU of the communicationdevice are displayed on the display, the CPU controlled 3D game objectis programmed to attack the user controlled 3D game object, and a userfired bullet object which indicates a bullet fired by the usercontrolled 3D game object is displayed on the display when a bulletfiring command is input via the input device; a 3D driving video gamefunction, wherein the input device utilized for purposes of implementinga voice communication mode is configured as an input means forperforming a 3D driving video game, a user controlled 3D automobilewhich is the three-dimensional game object indicating an automobilecontrolled by the user and a CPU controlled 3D automobile which is thethree-dimensional game object indicating another automobile controlledby the CPU of the communication device are displayed on the display, theCPU controlled 3D automobile is programmed to compete with the usercontrolled 3D automobile, and the user controlled 3D automobile iscontrolled by a user controlled 3D automobile controlling command inputvia the input device; an address book updating function which updatesthe address book stored in the communication device by personal computervia network; a batch address book updating function which updates alladdress books of a plurality of devices including the communicationdevice in one action; a batch scheduler updating function which updatesall schedulers of a plurality of devices including the communicationdevice in one action; a calculating function which implementsmathematical calculation by utilizing digits input via the input device;a spreadsheet function which displays a spreadsheet on the display,wherein the spreadsheet includes a plurality of cells which are alignedin a matrix fashion; a word processing function which implements a boldformatting function, an italic formatting function, and/or a fontformatting function, wherein the bold formatting function changesalphanumeric data to bold, the italic formatting function changesalphanumeric data to italic, and the font formatting function changesalphanumeric data to a selected font; a TV remote controlling functionwherein a TV control signal is transferred via the wirelesscommunication system, the TV control signal is a wireless signal tocontrol a TV tuner; a CD/PC inter-communicating function which retrievesthe data stored in a data storage area and transfers the data directlyto another computer by utilizing infra-red signal in a wireless fashion;a pre-dialing/dialing/waiting sound selecting function, wherein aselected pre-dialing sound which is one of the plurality of pre-dialingsound is registered, a selected dialing sound which is one of theplurality of dialing sound is registered, and a selected waiting soundwhich is one of the plurality of waiting sound is registered by the userof the communication device, and during the process of implementing avoice communication mode, the selected pre-dialing sound is output fromthe speaker before a dialing process is initiated, the selected dialingsound is output from the speaker during the dialing process isinitiated, and the selected waiting sound is output from the speakerafter the dialing process is completed; a startup software function,wherein a startup software identification data storage area stores astartup software identification data which is an identification of acertain software program selected by the user, when the power of thecommunication device is turned on, the startup software functionretrieves the startup software identification data from the startupsoftware identification data storage area and activates the certainsoftware program; the display includes a 1st display and a 2nd displaywhich display visual data in a stereo fashion, the microphone includes a1st microphone and a 2nd microphone which input audio data in a stereofashion, and the communication device further comprises a vibrator whichvibrates the communication device, an infra-red transmitting devicewhich transmits infra-red signals, a flash light unit which emits strobelight, a removable memory which stores a plurality of digital data andremovable from the communication device, and a photometer which a sensorto detect light intensity; a stereo audio data output function whichenables the communication device to output audio data in a stereofashion; a stereo visual data output function, wherein a left visualdata storage area stores a left visual data, a right visual data storagearea stores a right visual data, stereo visual data output functionretrieves the left visual data from the left visual data storage areaand displays on a left display and retrieves the right visual data fromthe right visual data storage area and displays on a right display; amultiple signal processing function, wherein the communicationimplements wireless communication under a 1st mode and a 2nd mode, thewireless communication is implemented by utilizing cdma2000 signal underthe 1st mode, and the wireless communication is implemented by utilizingW-CDMA signal under the 2nd mode; a pin-pointing function, wherein aplurality of in-door access points are installed in an artificialstructure, a target device location data which indicates the currentgeographic location of another device is identified by the geographicalrelation between the plurality of in-door access points and the anotherdevice, and the target device location data is indicated on the display;a CCD bar code reader function, wherein a bar code data storage areastores a plurality of bar code data, each of the plurality of bar codedata corresponds to a specific alphanumeric data, the CCD bar codereader function identifies the bar code data corresponding to a bar coderetrieved via a camera and identifies and displays the alphanumeric datacorresponding to the identified bar code data; an online rentingfunction which enables the user of communication device to download fromanother computing system and rent digital information for a certainperiod of time; an SOS calling function, wherein when a specific call ismade from the communication device, the SOS calling function retrieves acurrent geographic location data from a current geographic location datastorage area and retrieves a personal information data from a personalinformation data storage area and transfers the current geographiclocation data and the personal information data to a specific device ina wireless fashion; a PC remote controlling function, wherein an imagedata is produced by a personal computer, the image data is displayed onthe personal computer, the image data is transferred to thecommunication device, the image data is received via the wirelesscommunication system in a wireless fashion and stored in a data storagearea, the image data is retrieved from the data storage area anddisplayed on the display, a remote control signal input via the inputdevice is transferred to the personal computer via the wirelesscommunication system in a wireless fashion, and the personal computer iscontrolled in accordance with the remote control signal; a PC remotedownloading function, wherein the communication device sends a datatransferring instruction signal to a 1st computer via the wirelesscommunication system in a wireless fashion, wherein the datatransferring instruction signal indicates an instruction to the 1stcomputer to transfer a specific data stored therein to a 2nd computer;an audiovisual playback function, wherein an audiovisual data storagearea stores a plurality of audiovisual data, an audiovisual data isselected from the audiovisual data storage area, the audiovisualplayback function replays the audiovisual data if a replaying command isinput via the input device, the audiovisual playback function pauses toreplay the audiovisual data if a replay pausing command is input via theinput device, the audiovisual playback function resumes to replay theaudiovisual data if a replay resuming command is input via the inputdevice, the audiovisual playback function terminates to replay theaudiovisual data if a replay terminating command is input via the inputdevice, the audiovisual playback function fast-forwards to replay theaudiovisual data if a replay fast-forwarding command is input via theinput device, and the audiovisual playback function fast-rewinds toreplay the audiovisual data if a replay fast-rewinding command is inputvia the input device; an audio playback function which enables thecommunication device to playback audio data selected by the user of thecommunication device; a ticket purchasing function which enables thecommunication device to purchase tickets in a wireless fashion; a remotedata erasing function, wherein a data storage area stores a plurality ofdata, the remote data erasing function deletes a portion or all datastored in the data storage area in accordance with a data erasingcommand received from another computer via the wireless communicationsystem in a wireless fashion, the data erasing command identifies thedata to be erased selected by the user; a business card function whichretrieves a 1st business card data indicating the name, title, phonenumber, email address, and office address of the user of thecommunication device from the data storage area and sends via thewireless communication system in a wireless fashion and receives a 2ndbusiness card data indicating the name, title, phone number, emailaddress, and office address of the user of another device via thewireless communication system in a wireless fashion and stores the 2ndbusiness card data in the data storage area; a game vibrating functionwhich activates a vibrator of the communication device when a 1st gameobject contacts a 2nd game object displayed on the display; a part-timerfinding function which enables the user of the communication device tofind a part-time job in a specified manner by utilizing thecommunication device; a parking lot finding function which enables thecommunication device to display the closest parking lot with vacantspaces on the display with the best route thereto; an on demand TVfunction which enables the communication device to display TV program onthe display in accordance with the user's demand; an inter-communicatingTV function which enables the communication device to send answer datato host computing system at which the answer data from a plurality ofcommunication devices including the communication device are counted andthe counting data is produced; a display controlling function whichenables the communication device to control the brightness and/or thecontrast of the display per file opened or software program executed; amultiple party communicating function which enables the user of thecommunication device to voice communicate with more than one person viathe communication device; a display brightness controlling functionwhich controls the brightness of the display in accordance with thebrightness detected by a photometer of the surrounding area of the userof the communication device; a multiple party pin-pointing functionwhich enables the communication device to display the current locationsof a plurality of devices in artificial structure; a digital camerafunction, wherein a photo quality identifying command is input via theinput device, when a photo taking command is input via the input device,a photo data retrieved via a camera is stored in a photo data storagearea with the quality indicated by the photo quality identifyingcommand; a phone number linking function which displays a phone numberlink and dials a phone number indicated by the phone number link whenthe phone number link is selected; a multiple window displaying functionwhich displays a plurality of windows simultaneously on the display; amouse pointer displaying function which displays on the display a mousepointer which is capable to be manipulated by the user of thecommunication device; a house item pin-pointing function which enablesthe user of the communication device to find the location of the houseitems for which the user is looking in a house, wherein the house itemsare the tangible objects placed in a house which are movable by humanbeing; a membership administrating function in which host computingsystem allows only the users of the communication device who have paidthe monthly fee to access host computing system to implement a certainfunction; a keyword search timer recording function which enables totimer record TV programs which meet a certain criteria set by the userof the communication device; a weather forecast displaying functionwhich displays on the display the weather forecast of the currentlocation of the communication device; a multiple language displayingfunction, wherein a selected language is selected from a plurality oflanguages, and the selected language is utilized to operate thecommunication device; and a caller's information displaying functionwhich displays personal information regarding caller on the display whenthe communication device receives a phone call.

1. A communication device, which is a handheld device, comprising: amicrophone; a speaker; an input device; a display; an antenna; a voicecommunicating implementer, wherein voice communication is implementedwith another device via said antenna; a video game implementer, whereina video game object which is operable to be controlled by the user inputis displayed; an auto time adjusting implementer, wherein the clock ofsaid communication device is automatically adjusted by referring to acertain data received via said antenna; a moving picture displayingimplementer, wherein a moving picture image is retrieved from saidcommunication device and displayed; a calculating implementer, wherein amathematical calculation is implemented on the user entered figures andthe result of said mathematical calculation is displayed; a boldformatting implementer, wherein the user selected letter(s) is/arechanged to bold; an italic formatting implementer, wherein the userselected letter(s) is/are changed to italic; a font formattingimplementer, wherein the font of the user selected letter(s) is changedto a certain font; a stereo audio output implementer, wherein stereoaudio data stored in said communication device is processed to be outputin a stereo fashion; a device vibration implementer, wherein saidcommunication device is vibrated when a certain event is determined tobe occurred; a photo quality setting implementer, wherein a photo isstored in said communication device with the user identified quality; amultiple language implementer, wherein a list of multiple languages isdisplayed from which the user is operable to select a certain language,and the user interface of said communication device is displayed withthe selected certain language; and a caller's information displayingimplementer, wherein upon receiving a phone call, a caller's informationwhich indicates the phone number and/or name of the caller is displayed.2. The communication device of claim 1, wherein said input device is akey pad.
 3. The communication device of claim 1, wherein said stereoaudio data is output from a first speaker and a second speaker.
 4. Thecommunication device of claim 1, wherein the quality with which saidphoto is stored in said communication device is identified by selectingfrom multiple selectable qualities.
 5. The communication device of claim1, wherein said list of multiple languages includes English.
 6. Thecommunication device of claim 1, wherein said caller's informationfurther indicates the caller's title at work and/or address.
 7. A systemcomprising: a communication device, which is a handheld device,comprising a microphone, a speaker, an input device, a display, and anantenna; a voice communicating implementer, wherein voice communicationis implemented with another device via said antenna; a video gameimplementer, wherein a video game object which is operable to becontrolled by the user input is displayed; an auto time adjustingimplementer, wherein the clock of said communication device isautomatically adjusted by referring to a certain data received via saidantenna; a moving picture displaying implementer, wherein a movingpicture image is retrieved from said communication device and displayed;a calculating implementer, wherein a mathematical calculation isimplemented on the user entered figures and the result of saidmathematical calculation is displayed; a bold formatting implementer,wherein the user selected letter(s) is/are changed to bold; an italicformatting implementer, wherein the user selected letter(s) is/arechanged to italic; a font formatting implementer, wherein the font ofthe user selected letter(s) is changed to a certain font; a stereo audiooutput implementer, wherein stereo audio data stored in saidcommunication device is processed to be output in a stereo fashion; adevice vibration implementer, wherein said communication device isvibrated when a certain event is determined to be occurred; a photoquality setting implementer, wherein a photo is stored in saidcommunication device with the user identified quality; a multiplelanguage implementer, wherein a list of multiple languages is displayedfrom which the user is operable to select a certain language, and theuser interface of said communication device is displayed with theselected certain language; and a caller's information displayingimplementer, wherein upon receiving a phone call, a caller's informationwhich indicates the phone number and/or name of the caller is displayed.8. The system of claim 7, wherein said input device is a key pad.
 9. Thesystem of claim 7, wherein said stereo audio data is output from a firstspeaker and a second speaker.
 10. The system of claim 7, wherein thequality with which said photo is stored in said communication device isidentified by selecting from multiple selectable qualities.
 11. Thesystem of claim 7, wherein said list of multiple languages includesEnglish.
 12. The system of claim 7, wherein said caller's informationfurther indicates the caller's title at work and/or address.
 13. Amethod for a communication device, which is a handheld device,comprising a microphone, a speaker, an input device, a display, and anantenna, said method comprising: a voice communicating implementingstep, wherein voice communication is implemented with another device viasaid antenna; a video game implementing step, wherein a video gameobject which is operable to be controlled by the user input isdisplayed; an auto time adjusting implementing step, wherein the clockof said communication device is automatically adjusted by referring to acertain data received via said antenna; a moving picture displayingimplementing step, wherein a moving picture image is retrieved from saidcommunication device and displayed; a calculating implementing step,wherein a mathematical calculation is implemented on the user enteredfigures and the result of said mathematical calculation is displayed; abold formatting implementing step, wherein the user selected letter(s)is/are changed to bold; an italic formatting implementing step, whereinthe user selected letter(s) is/are changed to italic; a font formattingimplementing step, wherein the font of the user selected letter(s) ischanged to a certain font; a stereo audio output implementing step,wherein stereo audio data stored in said communication device isprocessed to be output in a stereo fashion; a device vibrationimplementing step, wherein said communication device is vibrated when acertain event is determined to be occurred; a photo quality settingimplementing step, wherein a photo is stored in said communicationdevice with the user identified quality; a multiple languageimplementing step, wherein a list of multiple languages is displayedfrom which the user is operable to select a certain language, and theuser interface of said communication device is displayed with theselected certain language; and a caller's information displayingimplementing step, wherein upon receiving a phone call, a caller'sinformation which indicates the phone number and/or name of the calleris displayed.
 14. The method of claim 13, wherein said input device is akey pad.
 15. The method of claim 13, wherein said stereo audio data isoutput from a first speaker and a second speaker.
 16. The method ofclaim 13, wherein the quality with which said photo is stored in saidcommunication device is identified by selecting from multiple selectablequalities.
 17. The method of claim 13, wherein said list of multiplelanguages includes English.
 18. The method of claim 13, wherein saidcaller's information further indicates the caller's title at work and/oraddress.